Home

ZyXEL NBG-417N User's Manual

1. H HHEBURIEE EISH XEOIG RREH SEHR IH o BPRS Hols TERRE Fe ZAR ERR RES BA SATE EE ELSE EYEE Sc eee H I PE EES AE ARBRE TEE UE Ba BBS SBT PRE P PS RPM HH e a MER or 4 o WAP TER HAN Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and
2. NBG 417N User s Guide 105 Chapter 9 LAN NBG 417N User s Guide DHCP Server 10 1 Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG 417N s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the NBG 417N provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 10 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 10 4 on page 108 to enable the DHCP server e Use the Advanced screen Section 10 5 on page 108 to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Use the Client List screen Section 10 6 on page 110 to view the current DHCP client information 10 3 What You Need To Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen Refer to Section 4 4 6 on page 43 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to the Section 4 4 7 on page 44 section for information on System DNS Servers NBG 417N User s Guide 107 Chapter 1
3. NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator NBG 417N User s Guide Connection Wizard 4 1 Wizard Setup This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator The Web Configurator s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet Refer to your ISP Internet Service Provider checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field Leave a field blank if you don t have that information 1 After you access the NBG 417N Web Configurator click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink You can click Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly Figure 9 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode Tha Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We est you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your P espanol f xm Bonae Ep 2 Choose a language by clicking on the language s button The screen will update Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen Figure 10 Select a Language Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup Please choose the language you need M o Mft NBG 417N User s Guide 35 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 3 Read the on screen information and click Next Figure 11 Welcome to the Connection Wizard Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard T
4. NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser click JavaScript Options Figure 133 Opera JavaScript Options x Allow resizing of windows Allow moving of windows Allow raising of windows Allow lowering of windows Allow changing of status field Allow scripts to detect context menu events Allow script to hide address bar Open console on error Mser JavaScript Folder Choose cma Select the items you want Opera s JavaScript to apply NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions NBG 417N User s Guide C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific NBG 417N may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address
5. NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PART
6. Personal c ow M B uU o Q Appearance Desktop amp Expos amp International Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware E V o S a CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Dist amp Print amp Fax Saver Mouse Internet amp N Mac Network QuickTime Sharing System Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine X Universal Controls Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types e Internal Modem Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but e PPPoE your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected dicii Configure Using DHCP Hd Not Connected g x g e FireWire Not Connected AirPort e Off eww DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 1 id Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 Forstatically assigned settings do the following NBG 417N User s Guide 217 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask e In the Router field enter the IP address of your NBG 417N Location Automatic E e Internal Modem Qe Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but
7. Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 29 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Fragmentation The threshold number of bytes for the fragmentation boundary for directed Threshold messages It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter an even number between 256 and 2346 This field is not available when Super Mode is selected Beacon When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon it includes with it a beacon Interval interval This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon This value can be set from 20ms to 1000ms A high value helps save current consumption of the access point DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network This value can be set from 1 to 100 Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the NBG 417N does it cannot communicate with the NBG 417N CTS Protection When set to None the NBG 417N protects wireless communication against interference When set to Always the NBG 417N improves
8. NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Click Next to configure the NBG 417N for Internet access Figure 12 Wizard Step 1 System Information STEP1 STEP2 gt STEP 3 ff System Information four router on the network This information is optional and you System Name INBG 4171 domain name is of senta i t to the router If you are having ng I nay omain Name manually in the sid is normally left blank cco The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Wizard Step 1 System Information LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG 417N in an Ethernet network Enter a descriptive name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Domain Name Type the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 3 Connection Wizard STEP 2 Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen Figure 13 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 fa wireless LAN D is the name giv rk m your hom
9. 10 L i L l E a chm _Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network gt NAT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number read only Name Type a unique name up to 15 characters for identification purposes All characters are permitted including spaces Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The NBG 417N forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers NBG 417N User s Guide 117 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 48 Network gt NAT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the NBG 417N to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 5 1 Trigger Port Forwardi
10. T 143 1123 Wis wd Need TB ED sica espdiedioece lioe pea Id LocUn a 143 172 1 Remote Management LISENOFMS 3uuuccescce sees ntes tid en REEL nar rtu en LL red ando ek S denar adn RE aA 144 17 3 2 Remote Management and NAT Lucus rsen rk tua aro edant vedendo aaa Feud qud ask ape dau is 144 TAG Sus POE i seesoiicn cenam etim rep t abes ROM ERE ered dote hsc ta Coe aa o pe Id utR Eo dat afa 144 TANN SG nasi ene ane Rt a ERA Ea aA 144 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPR Jisan taasan aa E aa a aaia ie 146 jp xBe c ote 146 fcr WOU Es P 146 19 Doub PSC Ty KION Ree cm 146 15 4 UPnP DPI 3 eceicstes qutm PvE oboe Msn bet bv diis r qut ER n epQ tx bv ROME QI Q ME IPOD DIE pPTREBIET qui TP dUUMUI E 147 15 5 Technics CLS E Giscoi PROUe P rH eo bU A HEP EEEPOAE A en ad RE E Dd CRIT 148 Pea 1 Uema URNE m Widows AP EXIDE aiii oda de usb ntl t bett ine bc se aod udid 148 19 52 Vies Lon iguredar ESO ACCESO usce eissuiodetasc toner Estes t tasso de taste sepe Aaa NEUE 150 NBG 417N User s Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 19 I E acerca E as cc a ect eg see ese ee eee ace 153 DESNUE SS II E TE UTILES POTE NN RUPEE UNE ELEME UN 153 pea virneicpe g6 gee mp 153 TO Sy uri p ger 153 9 Tine Joel OF oa cade nics poe iq Hep Ub bak n ddr QNMebeca diner pede ebUpIMdbt bee dici Een EN OM RP RAM Ue 155 Chapter 20 Boie P A C OKOK0 0 O
11. 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 145 WPA 2 PSK Authentication lt INTERNEJ Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 83 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY BU ah eo IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY z MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The ant
12. Figure 24 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General General System Operation Mode C Router C access Point q Note Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Apply Reset 3 A pop up appears providing information on this mode Click OK in the pop up message window See Section 22 4 on page 165 for more information on the pop up Click Apply Your NBG 417N is now in AP Mode Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes 5 3 Status Screen AP Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode Figure 25 Status Screen AP Mode B Refresh Interval i None z Refresh Now e System Name ZyXEL NBG 417N System Up Time 0 1 34 Firmware Version V1 00 BFM 2 B2 Current Date Time 2009 01 01 00 01 58 LAN Inforrnation System Resource MAC Address 00 44 97 53 00 D0 CPU Usage SSS 55 2 IP Address 192 168 1 2 Memory Usage 69 e IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP None WLAN Information E zi MAC Address 00 BB 97 53 03 40 OP Mode Status On Name SSID ZyXEL NBG 417N Channel 6 Operating Channel 6 Security Mode No
13. NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix E Services Table 84 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems
14. PPPoE Qe your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet 2 1 Ww Congue IP Address a Y Subnet Mask gt e on m D Router CO DNS Server Search Domains A 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 TU CAavanced 1 a Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click Apply and close the window NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 135 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility eoo twork Utili Info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger PortScan Please sels eiueckinterface for information Network Interface en1 a Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 Transfer Statistics IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installatio
15. Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 id Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network I nterface from the I nfo tab Figure 134 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility eoe Network Utility info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan iaterface for information Network Interface en0 i Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 1 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 but can also apply to 10 6 Click Apple System Preferences Finder File Edit Viev About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software ee System Preferences UO gt Recent Items b Force Quit EO Sleep Restart Shut Down NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon
16. oo x hour o0 v min C on off Thu oo hour oo min o 00 hour 00 v min Con ort Fri foo chour oo min o0 z hour o0 v min Con ort sta oo chour oo min oo z hour oo min Con off sun foo hour oo min o0 hour o0 v mim Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Wireless Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling LAN Scheduling Action Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the following times fields Day Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days This field works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field Except for the Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute min drop down following times boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute min 24 Hour Format drop down boxes If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields Note Entering the same begin ti
17. Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode If you select Access Point the following pop up message window appears Figure 113 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General AP A Ports are LAN 5 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN LAN DHCP server is disabled amp unconfigurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 2 WAN IP is unreachable In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports including the port labeled WAN There is no WAN port e The DHCP server on your device is disabled In AP mode there must be a device with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 2 The following table describes the labels in the General screen Table 66 Maintenance Sys OP Mode General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Operation Mode Router Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet This mode offers services such as a firewall or content filter Access Point Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network Apply Click Apply to save your settings Reset Click Reset to return your settings to the default Router Note If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the Internet 166 NBG 417N User s Guide Languag
18. Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version NBG 417N User s Guide 269 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 270 In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work i
19. e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner NBG 417N User s Guide
20. 2483 5 MHz Il n y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en int rieur ou dans d autres parties de la bande 2 4 GHz Consultez http www arcep fr pour de plus amples d tails R amp TTE 1999 5 EC WLAN 2 4 2 4835 GHz IEEE 802 11 b g n Location Frequency Range GHz Power EIRP Indoor No restrictions 2 4 2 4835 100mW 20dBm Outdoor 2 4 2 454 100mW 20dBm 2 454 2 4835 10mW 10dBm Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner s property its use requires a general authorization Please check http www sviluppoeconomico gov it for more details Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia Se non viene installato all interno del proprio 278 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information fondo l utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale Consultare http www sviluppoeconomico gov it per maggiori dettagli Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2 4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office Please check http www esd lv for more details 2 4 GHz frekven u joslas izmanto anai arpus telp m nepiecie ama atiauja no Elektronisko sa
21. Ban z A 11 O High x Both zl 12 r High x Both zl To add the MSN Messenger service in the Priority Queue 1 Click Enable in one of the fields for additional services 2 Add MSN as the service name NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Set the priority for this to High 4 For the port choose TCP from the drop down menu and enter 1863 in the Specific Port field Your priority table should now have the VoIP E mail and MSN Messenger services priorities set to High 6 3 3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Range For this example your company s 20th anniversary is coming up You want to use the multimedia room s Internet connection to upload some videos to the website You also use this room for video conferences radio broadcasts live video streaming and so on throughout the day While these media heavy activities are going on you still want to keep uploading the videos in the background As such you want to dedicate the minimum amount of bandwidth for this traffic You know the following e Multimedia room s LAN IP range 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 34 e IP Address of the computer uploading through FTP 192 168 1 34 e Services you want to configure REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 RTSP TCP or UDP 554 VDO LIVE TCP 7000 FTP TCP 20 21 Click the Edit icon in Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced to open the following screen Figure 39 Tutorial Ba
22. Copyright 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make Sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribut
23. LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset 21 4 1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up save the NBG 417N s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your NBG 417N is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the NBG 417N s current configuration to your computer 21 4 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG 417N Table 65 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Note Do not turn off the NBG 417N while configuration file upload is in progress NBG 417N User s Guide 161 Chapter 21 Tools After you see a configuration upload successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG 417N again Figure 105 Configuration Restore Successful Restore Configur
24. NBG 417N User s Guide 271 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 272 NBG 417N User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of th
25. Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Restore Defaults Apply Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary slightly The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3 0 as well You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 129 Mozilla Firefox TOOLS gt Options IEEE Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctr 3 Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Ctrii ShifE A Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options i Session Manager NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 130 Mozilla Firefox Content Security T 1 9 Me Main Tabs Feeds Privacy Qu we ww Security Advanced w Block pop up windows IV Load images automatically IV Enable JavaScript IV Enable Java Exceptions Exceptions Advanced r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size 16 v Advanced Colors r File Types Configure how Firefox handles certain types of Files Manage rn oH Opera Opera
26. Section 12 4 on page 122 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the NBG 417N 12 3 What You Need To Know Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address 12 3 1 DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS You must have a public WAN IP address NBG 417N User s Guide 121 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS 12 4 Dynamic DNS Screen To change your NBG 417N s DDNS click Network gt DDNS The screen appears as shown Figure 74 Network gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider Www DynDNS ORG Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Type Host Name 1 User Name NENNEN Password FO Token ae el Enable Wildcard Option T
27. Section 7 5 on page 77 to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG 417N e Use the Advanced screen Section 7 6 on page 78 to allow intra BSS networking and set the RTS CTS Threshold NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e Use the QoS screen Section 7 7 on page 79 to ensure Quality of Service QoS in your wireless network e Use the WPS screen Section 7 8 on page 83 to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually e Use the WPS Station screen Section 7 9 on page 83 to add a wireless station using WPS e Use the Scheduling screen Section 7 10 on page 85 to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off e Use the WDS screen Section 7 11 on page 85 to set the operating mode of your NBG 417N to AP Bridge or Bridge Only and establish wireless links with other APs 7 3 What You Should Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentity e If two wireless networks overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information e Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compati
28. and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 6 Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of network clients using the NBG 417N s DHCP servers Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name Click Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List Note You can also view a read only client list by clicking the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen The following screen displays Figure 68 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List Client List DHCP Client Table a a A17 E 192 168 1 33 TWPC13262 01 00 1C C4 84 E0 4B Apply Refresh NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field dis
29. benefits 40 dial up connection see also Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 40 PPTP 41 98 see also Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 41 preamble mode 233 product registration 276 PSK 238 Q Quality of Service QoS 79 R RADIUS 234 message types 235 messages 235 shared secret key 235 NBG 417N User s Guide Index RADIUS server 71 registration product 276 related documentation 3 Remote management 143 and NAT 144 and the firewall 143 limitations 144 remote management session 143 system timeout 144 Reset button 27 162 Reset the device 27 Restore configuration 161 RF Radio Frequency 176 Roaming 78 RTS Request To Send 232 threshold 231 232 RTS CTS Threshold 69 78 S safety warnings 7 Scheduling 85 Service and port numbers 142 Service Set 73 Service Set IDentification 73 Service Set IDentity See SSID services and port numbers 243 and protocols 243 Session Initiated Protocol 142 SIP 142 SSID 29 51 70 73 stateful inspection firewall 125 Static DHCP 108 Static Route 134 Status 27 subnet 179 Subnet Mask 105 subnet mask 44 180 subnetting 182 Summary DHCP table 31 Packet statistics 32 Wireless station status 33 syntax conventions 5 Sys Op Mode 164 System General Setup 153 System Name 154 System name 36 vs computer name System restart 163 T TCP IP configuration 107 Temperature 175 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 237 Time setting 1
30. except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Linux Kernel Busybox Igmpproxy Dnsmasq Iproute Rp pppoe Iptables Updatedd Linuxigd Wireless tools Bridge utils Pptp client Ppp Udhcp Ez ipupdate Uboot and Mtd utils under below GPL v2 license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that
31. 10 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary slightly NBG 417N User s Guide 197 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Allowing Pop Ups From Opera click Tools then Preferences In the General tab go to Choose how you prefer to handle pop ups and select Open all pop ups Figure 131 Opera Allowing Pop Ups General Forms Search Web Pages Advanced Opera can start with your favorite Web pages or continue from last time Startup Continue From last time Home page ntte fiportal opera com Lise Current Choose how you prefer to handle pop ups Pop ups C Open all pop t Open pop ups in background Block unwanted pop ups Block all pop ups Select your preferred language for Opera and Web pages Language Engish US en US Y Details Enabling Java x Preferences ox cme He From Opera click Tools then Preferences In the Advanced tab select Content from the left side menu Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 132 Opera Enabling Java Preferences General Forms Search Web Pag quy Tabs Enable animated images Browsing Notifications Enable sound in Web pages Enable JavaScript E JavaScript Option Enable plug ins Style Options Content settings can be adapted to each site Manage Site Preferences Blocked Content x OK Cancel Help
32. 107 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client information 110 DHCP client list 110 DHCP server 104 107 DHCP table 32 110 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 175 disclaimer 273 DNS 44 109 DNS server see also Domain name system DNS Server 92 DNS server 109 NBG 417N User s Guide Index Domain name 36 vs host name see also system name Domain Name System 109 Domain Name System See DNS duplex setting 30 51 Dynamic DNS 121 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 107 dynamic WEP key exchange 236 DynDNS 122 DynDNS see also DDNS 122 DynDNS Wildcard 121 E EAP Authentication 235 e mail 82 encryption 71 237 and local user database 72 key 72 WPA compatible 72 ESS 230 ESSID 173 Extended Service Set See ESS 230 Extended wireless security 38 F Factory LAN defaults 104 107 FCC interference statement 273 File Transfer Program 142 Firewall ICMP packets 127 ZyXEL device firewall 126 firewall stateful inspection 125 Firmware upload 159 file extension using HTTP firmware version 28 51 fragmentation threshold 232 FTP see also File Transfer Program 142 G gateway 134 General wireless LAN screen 72 H hidden node 231 HTTP 142 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 142 IANA 186 IBSS 229 IEEE 802 11g 233 IGMP 93 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 93 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 229 initialization vector IV
33. 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 i BP UI 192 168 1 34 EP d O B I n diu LM B r B WI r F ofjojujojafsj ojn e Fs g E e o Note The Policy column displays either Max maximum or Min minimum This is directly directed to the value in the Rate column For example you selected Min and entered 30M as the rate for the VoIP service The NBG 417N allocates atleast 30 megabytes for the VoIP service Refer to Appedix F on page 243 for a list of common services that you can add in the Bandwidth Mgnt screen NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials NBG 417N User s Guide PART II once T Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG 417N See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 41 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wireless clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to interact with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your NBG 417N is the AP 7 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 7 4 on page 72 to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Use the MAC Filter screen
34. 2 What You Can Do e Use the General screen Section 13 4 on page 126 to enable or disable the NBG 417N s firewall NBG 417N User s Guide 125 Chapter 13 Firewall e Use the Services screen Section 13 5 on page 127 screen enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them 13 3 What You Need To Know The NBG 417N s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks 13 3 1 About the NBG 417N Firewall The NBG 417N firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box The NBG 417N s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The NBG 417N can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The NBG 417N is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The NBG 417N has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the I
35. 417N User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 5 2 User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range click the Edit icon in the Bandwidth Allocation table of the Advanced screen The following screen displays Figure 85 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Allocation Setup Bandwidth Allocation Setup D Active Direction ToWAN LANIPRange oo00 foooo Protocol ALL Port Range sss Policy wn Rate o Kbps User Defined Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Allocation Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to turn on this bandwidth management rule Direction Enter whether you want to apply the rule to uplink or downlink traffic To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN i e downlink To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN i e uplink Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG 417N forwards to both the LAN and the WAN LAN IP Range Specify the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies Protocol Select the protocol TCP UDP SMTP HTTP POP3 FTP or ALL for which the bandwidth management rule applies Port Range Enter the range of ports for which the
36. 59 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG 417N using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address NBG 417N using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG 417N using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG 417N using this service Note This only applies on WAN IP Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP 18 1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the Web Configurator Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 18 2 What You Can Do Use the UPnP screen Section 18
37. AP Made i e er merear o na nid CR Ritt tess 54 Chapter 6 HU 55 CmEEC II PET 55 6 2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP 1 eem ntc t D E REEF I ER na 55 6 2 1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG 417N and Wireless Client 55 6 2 2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG 417N 59 6 3 Bandwidth Management for your MetWOIK 1 eise seni rnnt erba cis ea dm duda ra kl ida Si Ida 62 6 3 1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application sssesenne 62 6 3 2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom Application sees 63 6 3 3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Pange iesus edens trt nna 64 Part Il Technical HeIereriGaus uis ecu d pta ao S6 nen iE EE RE MAE eK m EDU RE ER Rr iaa EH dd eER 67 12 NBG 417N User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 7 Wireless LAN A 69 Pene 00 EE P A A A E A E AE E A E E E A N A Rr TS AEPA E T 69 PEA ORTE ieu e e E E E AE AE E E E E E A E E A A 69 Po VOU OE DERE assirian da ada 70 13 1 Wireless SOC CSO Rer 70 7 4 General Wireless LAN Gergen iusserit aad div da i ER dada e V a CE ad E a E EN da 72 FE Mer MU DL IT 74 PRS icis e 74 VE RR UC uncut sip cl e nae eqns ata RE 76 peor UES
38. Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address ame SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS Interface Status NBG 417N 1 00 BFM 0 B4 00 44 97 53 00 CB 172 23 37 46 255 255 255 0 Client 00 BB 97 53 03 2C 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server 00 BB 97 53 03 2C a SSID_Example3 6 6 WPA PSK 802 11 b g n Configured 6 2 2 1 Configure Your Notebook Refresh Interval None x System Status System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Bandwidth Management UPnP Summary 0 39 27 2008 12 29 09 01 39 a 0 47 76 Enable Enable Enable DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details Refresh Now Note We use the ZyXEL M 302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client The screens may vary for different models The NBG 417N supports IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and IEEE 802 11n wireless clients Make sure that your notebook or computer s wireless adapter supports one of these standards Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer See your wireless adapter s User s Guide for information on how to do that After you ve i
39. Appendix F Open Software Announcements operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Pro
40. Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN Figure 82 Bandwidth Management VOIP FTP HTTP Chat Email You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to individual applications like VoIP Web FTP and E mail for example 16 2 What You Can Do e Use the General screen Section 16 4 on page 137 to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink downlink limits Use the Advanced screen Section 16 5 on page 138 to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre defined services and applications NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 3 What You Need To Know You can limit an application s uplink or downlink bandwidth This limit keeps the traffic from using up too much of the out going interface s bandwidth This way you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications Use the following guidelines e The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface LAN to WAN WLAN to WAN must be less than or equal to the Uplink value that you configure in the Bandwidth Management General screen e The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port WAN to LAN WAN to WLAN must be less than or equal to the Downlink value that you configure in the Bandwidth Management General screen 16 4 General Configuration Use this screen to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink downlink limits You
41. Control may result in many e mails being sent 20 4 View Log Screen Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG 417N Options include logs about system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites blocked web features such as ActiveX controls Java and cookies attacks such as DoS and IPSec Log entries in red indicate system error logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order NBG 417N User s Guide 157 Chapter 20 Logs Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Figure 99 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log Yiew Log Logs Refresh Clear Logs ERN Message 3 4 5 1 Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Local time NTP Localtime 2008 12 19 12 53 46 12 53 46 2 Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Daylight saving status Disable Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Local time 2008 12 19 11 53 43 Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Daylight saving status Disable Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei UENIT RR a maT Dec 19 10 55 30 NET start Firewall Dec 19 10 55 30 NET start NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Maintenance Logs View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Ref
42. EU countries and other countries following the EU directive 1999 5 EC without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de l UE et dans tous les pays ayant transpos s la directive 1999 5 CE sans aucune limitation except pour les pays mentionn s ci dessous Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999 5 EC senza nessuna limitazione eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschr nkungen eingesetzt werden sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995 5 CE folgen mit AuBnahme der folgenden aufgef hrten Staaten In the majority of the EU and other European countries the 2 4 and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks LANs Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable The requirements for any country may evolve ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2 4 and 5 GHz wireless LANs The following countries have restrictions and or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band MHz Max P
43. FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s e If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately NBG 417N User s Guide 7 Safety Warnings NBG 417N User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Usro GUNO EE SLOT I IIT C UI m aian 19 Germa 10 KON Your tcx em 21 TIE WPa Rc us UL IU LI I T IT A 24 Introducing the Web COBTRQUESLOT iusciaciiosiese uni n Har cU RO Glia Fac ust kde t e a Rad L of EX SAU a aa 25 Connection ira e NA 35 mls e AT AEN 49 dps cadets m e TE 55 ho i 67 Peli eet E 69 PI E M 91 EX pts sr doctis cape T A uses caet E fd apa ado sodden tam Va SA Men ar salo NS baie Mie 103 DRGP SETET cissaucccdinbseeidubrerisiedbbecud s Deceit cass qieditbee idi bet D di eme plediebesq aile i beum ddibree Disdibs 107 Network Address Translation NAT ccc pcceacids iasteedinigdeendiia ylasspx da ER EE E
44. INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RI
45. IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER DA aaa IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 76 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 77 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 78 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET M
46. If there is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG 417N See Appendix C on page 201 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the NBG 417N with the default IP address See Section 3 3 on page 27 6 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a LAN ETHERNET port I can see the Login screen but I cannot log in to the NBG 417N 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session Try logging in again after 5 minutes 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG 417N 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 24 4 on page 173 24 3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide NBG 417N User s Guide 171 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If you a
47. NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation Figure 61 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation Connection Type User Name Password Retype to Confirm Idle Timeout Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access v Nailed Up Connection L Sa LLL p in minutes PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Domain l Connection ID Name o C Get automatically from ISP C Use fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address l My IP Subnet Mask l WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP z WAN MAC Address e Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C set WAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters f
48. NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTIO
49. Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly Note It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your NBG 417N you can also select an option WPA Compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG 417N Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key 7 3 1 5 WPS WiFi Protected Setup WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Depending on the devices in your network you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN Personal Identification Number in the devices Then
50. Web Configurator 3 1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG 417N Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens The Web Configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG 417N via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions or Safari 2 0 or later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG 417N hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG 417N refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type http 192 168 1 1 as the website address Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address 4 Type 1234 default as the password and click Login In some versions the default password appears automatically if this is the case click Login NBG 417N User s Guide 25 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 5 You should see a screen asking
51. a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal NBG 417N User s Guide 179 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 115 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 bE um u mm mm um umo um mmmmmmmmmm How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is
52. a safety level is selected NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 1 2 Click OK to close the window Figure 127 Security Settings Java Security Settings EU 7 xi Settings Q Disable 9 Enable ER Font download Q Disable 9 Enable y Prompt 5 Microsoft vM Er Java permissions custom tisable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings 1 Reset to Medium Reset cm JAVA Sun From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click OK to close the window Figure 128 Java Sun Internet Options Ux General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 9 Java E d Use Java 2141 0T for enol eques esi gt 2 v1 4 1 07 for d Use Java 2141 0T for enol eques esi gt requires restart 5 Microso v B Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later
53. and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference E NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending p
54. are probed You can also use this screen to enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them Click Security gt Firewall gt Services The screen appears as shown next Figure 77 Security gt Firewall gt Services o Services ICMP Respond to Ping on Lan M Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping The NBG 417N will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is on selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests NBG 417N User s Guide 127 Chapter 13 Firewall Table 51 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Do not respond to Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG 417N by probing for requests for unused ports If you select this option the NBG 417N will not respond
55. can add up to five computers to the NBG 417N when you connect to the Internet in AP mode Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub LEDs PWR LAN1 4 WAN WLAN WPS Reset Button The reset button is built into the rear panel Use this button to restore the NBG 417N to its factory default settings Press for 1 second to restart the device Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings Antenna WPS button Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security enabled wireless connection The NBG 417N is equipped with a 2dBi 2 4GHz detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network Operation Environment Temperature 09 C 409 C 32 F 1049F Humidity 20 90 Storage Environment Temperature 309 C 709 C 229F 158 F Humidity 20 95 Table 68 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default LAN IP Address 192 168 1 1 router 192 168 1 2 AP Default LAN Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Password 1234 DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Wireless Interface Wireless LAN NBG 417N User s Guide 175 Chapter 25 Product Specifications 176 Table 68 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default Wireless SSID ZyXEL Device Management Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of feature
56. can use either one of the following types Priority Queue Enable bandwidth management to give uplink traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule This type does not apply to downlink traffic e Bandwidth Allocation Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule Note You cannot apply both bandwidth management types at the same time Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen Figure 83 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General Service Management Bandwidth Management Type Priority Queue Total Bandwidth Setting Uplink 30720 Kbps 30M bps Downlink 30720 Kbps 30M bps z Apply Reset NBG 417N User s Guide 137 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Management Bandwidth This field allows you to have NBG 417N apply bandwidth management Management Type Select Priority Queue or Bandwidth Allocation to enable bandwidth management e Select Priority Queue to allocate bandwidth based on the pre defined priority assigned to an application Refer to Section 16 5 on page 138 e Select Bandwidth Allocation allocate specific amounts of band
57. com tw news Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s full path File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG 417N check all of the characters in the URL For example filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s complete filename NBG 417N User s Guide EN Chapter 14 Content Filtering 132 NBG 417N User s Guide Static Route 15 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG 417N This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG 417N Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the NBG 417N has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the NBG 417N knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the NBG 417N is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 via gateway Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the NBG 417N about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 79 Example of Static Routing Topology N2 N3 R1 R2 D 15 2 What You Can Do
58. communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the NBG 417N are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the NBG 417N identity NBG 417N User s Guide 233 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your NBG 417N Table 81 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG 417N and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x RADIUS In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Auth
59. contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
60. e Use the IP Static Route screen Section 15 3 on page 134 to view existing static route rules e Use the Static Route Setup screen Section 15 3 1 on page 135 to add or edit a static route rule NBG 417N User s Guide 133 Chapter 15 Static Route 15 3 IP Static Route Screen Use this screen to view existing static route rules Click Management gt Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen The following screen displays Figure 80 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup z om su Ii SERM The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Management Static Route IP Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an individual static route The first entry is for the default route and not editable Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Active This icon is turned on when this static route is active Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG 417N that will forward
61. encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm 237 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so
62. example for wireless communication B can access the Internet through the AP wirelessly Figure 28 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet 6 2 1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG 417N and Wireless Client This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS This example uses the NBG 417N as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook Note The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCI card There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection This tutorial shows you how to do both e Push Button Configuration PBC create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button See Section 6 2 1 1 on page 56 This is the easier method NBG 417N User s Guide 55 Chapter 6 Tutorials PIN Configuration create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client s PIN Personal Identification Number in the NBG 417N s interface See Section 6 2 1 2 on page 57 This is the more secure method since one device can authenticate the other 6 2 1 1 Push Button Configuration PBC Make sure that your NBG 417N is turned on and that it is within range of your computer Make sure that you have installed the wireless client this example uses the NWD210N driver and utility in your notebook In the wireless client utility find the WPS settings Enable WPS and press the WPS button Start or WPS bu
63. examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 70 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD Cus IDECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 71 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MARI MEEBO 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 22 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by
64. for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 84 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC_TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software TCP UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used t
65. gil leer c re tee terre rere rer emt R rere earree eerie rere ee rer 77 Tb Wireless LAN Advanced Sorea cisuccccccsierniasnrreneansceaeshrtencsenedasennnier odd recie dunk d Lad TANE Ra 78 Ta alty EE ips ere Pise NRI RTT 79 Fal Applealigm Prony Conigurahon usautpenenvetsterdstdpiebeeed tenbb e peHUia dou uu fea reos ten E Uc BE Eu MR ERE EE UL 81 FE XU Der IM M AY 83 TH MOPIS SUI Cl CEE a Doria pi d a bra ok atn N kx POAT Na dad za e RM BA E 83 FeEceu silium 85 FALE UCET T ER 85 CNXENE Iur se Siae CIPRO o o EDS 87 7 11 2 Security Mode WPA PSKAWPAS RES uussstzceccacsesceco codec eset a ssedussenssvadacessaduaseettaaqreennsies 88 Chapter 8 jd 91 BI MEO Love dae A AE E S E PE P dS E C LES EM E I T E A nia eure 91 SPAT VOU Sait DEK E E A E PE AE AE A E E E E E EE A 91 Ba Nhat You Need TO KION arsacsasn inab ash ob a brin a aad Fe Na 91 86 3 1 Configuring Your Intermet Connector a5 eeotascetecosdisb bee tau dst renine pace nda Pr eere d da b eR QI dde beds 92 FIM Fe m 93 ZPO qz euro MIEL afe TTD T 93 RSEN SV Nae Om RE E T SEES 94 84 Intemel CODeCBO asia daa ua or np nie dp P C ME Rd Pu ceu b c d daa 94 SATE NOTET ceci RTT T UU m TT 94 rd auccd i rr ee 96 BA PRT Bric E latin MT IT 98 5 5 Aevanee WAN SRS casceniveuteetidnmdipte ob RR covencat vesieanasntecodaumets ted Ut MEN te EOLRRE Pe Ge RUE RE U CR E
66. have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the part
67. more information on the next few screens 19 2 What You Can Do e Use the General screen Section 19 3 on page 153 to enter a name to identify the NBG 417N in the network and set the password Use the Time Setting screen Section 19 4 on page 155 to change your NBG 417N s time and date 19 3 System General Screen Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NBG 417N in the network and set the password Click Maintenance System The following screen displays Figure 97 Maintenance System General System Setup System Mame NBG 41 7N Domain Name zyxel com Administrator Inactivity Timer o minutes 0 means no timeout Password Setup Old Password z New Password pe Retype to Confirm jp Apply Reset NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 19 System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Maintenance gt System gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Setup System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG 417N in an Ethernet network It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer s name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assi
68. on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 18 4 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP Click the Management gt UPnP to open the following screen Figure 87 Management gt UPnP gt General UPnP Setup Note computers using UPnP Device Name ZyXEL NBG 417N Internet Sharing Gateway IV Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN 2 For WPS to function normally the UPnP service must be available Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Management gt UPnP gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator s login screen without entering the NBG 417N s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the Web Configurator Allow users to make port forwarding changes through Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG 417N so that they can communicate UPnP through the NBG 417N for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled
69. s Guide EB Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files including large files that it may not be possible to send via e mail FTP uses port number 21 WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser e User Defined User defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save
70. s MAC address by either using the NBG 417N s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to configuration file It is NBG 417N User s Guide LE Chapter 4 Connection Wizard advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Figure 21 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address STEP 1 gt STEP 2 STEPS f Internet Configuration fault or cloning the d t dd enter the IP add Factory default Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address aang Set WAN MAC nh ES000 00 00 00 00 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 18 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Clone the Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose computer s MAC MAC you are cloning It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer address on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving NBG 417N User s G
71. set up connections See full map ZyXEL com Internet Connect or disconnect Access type Internet Connections g Local Area Connection NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties QU gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this A Local Area Connection Wireless Network Connection ae _ Unidentified network y i ZyXEL_RT 7 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ifl 802 11n W USB Adapter General Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivity No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Sent As Received a2 0 Goa ee Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Connect using e Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items 9l Client for Microsoft Networks E QoS Packet Scheduler vi dalzie Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder unns Properties Description Transmission Contr
72. the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows Vista 1 2 This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional Click Start gt Control Panel Be RES Y Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To eval Media Player Classic d Control Panel Default Programs gt AllPrograms o v j WM Nol GOo Control Panel bal neal 2 File Edit View Tools Help Back up your computer Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Control Panel Home z t System and Maintena
73. the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG 417N over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen Modify a static route or create a new Static route in the Static Route Setup screen Click the Remove icon to delete a static route NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route 15 3 1 Static Route Setup Screen To edit a static route click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Fill in the required information for each static route Figure 81 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup Static Route Setup i Cancel Route Name D Active Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the su
74. the system tray Figure 92 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information 6 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 93 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer w amp 3 Packets Sent 8 Received 5 943 Close 18 5 2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the NBG 417N without finding out the IP address of the NBG 417N first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG 417N Follow the steps below to access the Web Configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 94 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe z x JO search le Folders E Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks fa Create a new connection 2 Set up a home or small office network See Also Local Area Connection Enabled DD Network Troubleshooter o rs A A
75. um um um 7 192 168 1 1 SS a am um um um eee eee m U QA m 188 NBG 417N User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6 7 and 8 Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 121 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 122 Internet Options Privacy Interne
76. used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 69 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST OCTET 20D EE 4TH OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following
77. valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section 7 3 1 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See Section 7 3 1 3 on page 71 for information about this Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network
78. you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
79. 0 Gateway IP Address p 0 0 0 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP WAN MAC Address c Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C Set WAN MAC Address 000000 000000 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Type You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the from ISP default selection Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed I P Address IP Subnet Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field Mask Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address DNS Servers NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG 417N s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only Second DNS DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Server Select User Defined if y
80. 0 DHCP Server 10 4 General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server Click Network gt DHCP Server The following screen displays Figure 66 Network gt DHCP Server gt General DHCP Setup M Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address fis2 168 1 33 Pool Size 2 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network gt DHCP Server gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Server Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at startup from a server Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise Clear it to disable the NBG 417N acting as a DHCP server When configured as a server the NBG 417N provides TCP IP configuration for the clients If not DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computers must be manually configured When set as a server fill in the following four fields IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address Address pool for LAN Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool for LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 Advanced Screen This sc
81. 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP addre
82. 157 DES c S o A 187 20 24MDar VOU Cam DO usce tddite et Dueb tbe qe nb epe Uo DES Duel tbe vn IE BE M Qu REF ud Ex Le E RE BERN ONU DEM d DuER ELE 157 20 3 What YOU Need W KNOW c 157 EO VIEW Lod OORT ers ascend a a aA aa amu Rma D RE DAR addi Pa ro 157 Chapter 21 TOO S AA M 159 AREE UI dT E ERU 159 2L2 Wis Yeu Can Du 2 envoi ER PR c o kr a e REO ae S b RR nC QR ER E iU 159 212 Frimware plos Seal iussi cossucoseburi tes ia boe val an our Us aeos EOAR 159 Pa Configuration SE MR 161 STE WBA SNO UE a E A E T AA cene Con Eae dra o E Ub da a 161 2152 Pecore CODI ESO 5sdedi ect ebd e beca tdi qu be pe DAE Decet deg b ncU adao be phi dd b omarion bae d ghe 161 214 2 Buck TO Factor Donul a sass deck theses d aee etu d Verte n ROS a DUE RR M Maa NA Re DU uA 162 2 123 ROSTER Dachau le al a accel RU EU bl A Sn el sha and aa eal I NR PUE altel DAN SERIES 163 Chapter 22 SYS OP MOG 164 NEG s P 164 Bec Vee ERIS ENT IE MN aT T D DO D OD 164 2205 VIS VH DIOEDUDO KUON cus eese ene too POE EY RE RPe t ne ERO ipn nex ut pneu cu CREE BEN LEN Led Pep Eon dut ets 164 BoA AE al SO BIS oat irr ia POCHE OR CHR Gen a PC DOR ao Cae ta P e T Lg ba C aa pa uc 165 Chapter 23 Mss at RR T 167 FW EIC f wr o TE ree 187 Chapter 24 iu ne 169 241 Power Ha
83. 17N User s Guide 231 Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 143 RTS CTS RTS Range Wireless AP a Station y RTS s 7 CTS Range When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network
84. 235 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS
85. 238 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 186 Internet connection Ethernet PPPoE see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection Internet connection wizard 39 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 93 IP Address 105 114 115 IP address 43 dynamic IP Pool 108 L LAN 103 IP pool setup 104 NBG 417N User s Guide Index LAN overview 103 LAN setup 103 LAN TCP IP 104 Language 167 Link type 29 51 local user database 71 and encryption 72 Local Area Network 103 Log 157 MAC 77 MAC address 70 92 cloning 45 92 MAC address filter 70 MAC address filtering 77 MAC filter 77 managing the device good habits 22 using the Web Configurator See Web Configurator using the WPS See WPS MBSSID 21 Media access control 77 Memory usage 29 51 Message Integrity Check MIC 237 Metric 135 mode 21 Multicast 93 IGMP 93 N NAT 113 114 186 how it works 113 overview 113 see also Network Address Translation NAT traversal 146 Navigation Panel 30 52 navigation panel 30 52 NetBIOS 93 see also Network Basic Input Output System 93 Network Address Translation 113 114 O Operating Channel 29 51 operating mode 21 P P2P 142 Pairwise Master Key PMK 238 239 peer to peer 142 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 40 96 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 41 98 Pool Size 108 Port forwarding 115 default server 115 local server 115 port speed 30 51 Power Specification 175 PPPoE 40 96
86. 3 Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the 6 AirPort connection 1 id Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab ean Network 4 Show All Q Location Automatic Hj Show Built in Ethernet m PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Using DHCP HJ IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 Qo 1 Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me 3 Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure I Pv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask e In the Router field type the IP address of your device ean Network 4 Show All Q Location Automatic i Show Built in Ethernet m PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually is IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0
87. 38 vs WPA2 PSK 238 wireless client supplicant 238 with RADIUS application example 239 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 237 WPA2 PSK 237 238 application example 239 WPA PSK 237 238 application example 239 WPS 22 WWW 82 142 X Xbox Live 142 NBG 417N User s Guide Index NBG 417N User s Guide
88. 4 on page 147 to enable UPnP on the NBG 417N 18 3 What You Need to Know How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the NBG 417N allows multicast messages
89. 55 trigger port 117 Trigger port forwarding 117 example 118 process 118 U Universal Plug and Play 146 application 146 UPnP 146 security issues 147 URL Keyword Blocking 130 user authentication 71 local user database 71 RADIUS server 71 User Name 122 V VoIP 142 VPN 98 W WAN NBG 417N User s Guide Index IP address assignment 43 WAN Wide Area Network 91 WAN advanced 100 WAN IP address 43 WAN IP address assignment 44 WAN MAC address 92 warranty 275 note 275 Web Configurator 22 how to access 25 Overview 25 Web configurator navigating 27 WEP Encryption 75 WEP encryption 74 WEP key 74 Wi Fi Protected Access 237 Wildcard 121 Wireless association list 33 wireless channel 173 wireless client WPA supplicants 238 wireless LAN 173 wireless LAN scheduling 85 Wireless LAN wizard 37 Wireless network basic guidelines 69 channel 70 encryption 71 example 69 MAC address filter 70 overview 69 security 70 SSID 70 Wireless security 70 overview 70 type 70 wireless security 173 233 Wireless tutorial 49 55 WPS 55 Wizard setup 35 complete 47 Internet connection 39 system information 36 wireless LAN 37 WLAN interference 231 security parameters 240 World Wide Web 142 WPA 237 key caching 238 pre authentication 238 user authentication 238 vs WPA PSK 238 wireless client supplicant 238 with RADIUS application example 239 WPA compatible 72 WPA2 237 user authentication 2
90. 68 1 64 This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses excluding the NBG 417N itself in the lower range 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1 32 for other server computers for instance servers for mail FTP TFTP web etc that you may have Refer to Section 4 4 6 on page 43 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask 9 3 2 LAN TCP IP The NBG 417N has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability Refer to the Section 4 4 7 on page 44 section for information on System DNS Servers NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 9 LAN 9 4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings Click Network gt LAN Figure 65 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP IP Address fis2 168 1 4 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG 417N in dotted decimal notation 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG 417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG 417N Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh
91. AN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server manage IP addresses and partition your physical network into logical networks Figure 63 LAN Setup WLAN uw rev firewall The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 9 2 What You Can Do Use the IP screen Section 9 4 on page 105 to change your basic LAN settings NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 9 LAN 9 3 What You Need To Know The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG 417N ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 64 LAN and WAN IP Addresses ILAN WAN 4 The LAN parameters of the NBG 417N are preset in the factory with the following values e IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits e DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured 9 3 1 IP Pool Setup The NBG 417N is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 1
92. ASK NO SUBNETS NO NOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a Table 79 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 79 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP address
93. Autobridging Example IP Address 192 168 1 20 This might happen if you put the NBG 417N behind a NAT router that assigns it this IP address When the NBG 417N is in auto bridge mode the NBG 417N acts as an AP and all the interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN are bridged In this mode your NAT DHCP server and firewall on the NBG 417N are not available You do not have to reconfigure them if you return to router mode Auto bridging only works under the following conditions The WAN IP must be 192 168 x y where x and y must be from zero to nine If the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address are in the same subnet but x or y is greater than nine the device operates in router mode with firewall available e The device must be in Router Mode see Chapter 22 on page 164 for more information for auto bridging to become active 8 4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG 417N s Internet access settings Click Network WAN The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose 8 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation Figure 59 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Ethernet WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP C Use fixed IP Address IP Address p 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask p 00
94. Connection STEP1 STEP2 gt STEP3 ff Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Password Seek net gt Jet NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access Connection Type Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection Service Name Type the name of your service provider User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 3 PPTP Connection Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP Note The NBG 417N supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Figure 18 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection STEPS Sree STEPS fa Internet Configuration Enter your I
95. EELY COPY MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden a
96. EP WEP Encryption 64 bit WEP z Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission C ascii C Hex C key 1 l C key 2 C key 3 C key 4 l Apply Reset NBG 417N User s Guide 87 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Refer to Table 35 on page 86 for descriptions of other fields in this screen Table 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP Encryption Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption Authentication There are two types of WEP authentication namely Open System and Shared Method Key Open system is implemented for ease of use and when security is not an issue The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer e Select Shared Key to have the NBG 417N authenticate only those w
97. Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C Use specified IP Address p 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Network gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Enter your user name Password Enter the password assigned to you Token Enter your client authorization key provided by the server to update DynDNS records This field is configurable only when you select WWW REGFI SH COM in the Service Provider field Enable Wildcard Option Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL that you can specify while you are off line IP Address Update Policy NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Table 49 Network gt Dyn
98. GHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agre
99. IES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
100. ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the NBG 417N s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Otherwise click Clone the computer s MAC address I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to configuration file It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 3 2 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Figure 57 Multicast Example A B T 3 e A In the multicast example above systems A and D comprise one multicast group In multicasting the server only needs to send one data stream and this is deli
101. L AHAQNEI OTI efonAlopog ZYMMOPOONETAI NPOX TIZ OYZIQAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOINES ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEI2 TH2 OAHMIA 1999 5 EC French Par la pr sente ZyXEL d clare que l appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 EC Italian Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latvian Ar o ZyXEL deklare ka iekartas atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian Siuo ZyXEL deklaruoja kad Sis jranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Dutch Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EC Maltese Hawnhekk ZyXEL jiddikjara li dan taghmir jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Hungarian Alul rott ZyXEL nyilatkozom hogy a berendez s megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EK ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Polish Niniejszym ZyXEL o wiadcza ze sprz t jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portuguese ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e out
102. N 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes Libesmtp and Uclibc under the LGPL License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contr
103. N Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 140 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 141 Basic Service Set BSS ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide
104. NBG 417N Wireless N lite Home Router Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Password 1234 Firmware Version 1 0 Edition 4 10 2011 ZyXEL www zyxel com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG 417N using the Web Configurator Tips for Reading User s Guides On Screen When reading a ZyXEL User s Guide On Screen keep the following in mind e If you don t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader you can download it from http www adobe com e Use the PDF s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you Adobe Reader s bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User s Guide PDFs e If you know the page number or know vaguely which page range you want to view you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader then press ENTER to jump directly to that page Type CTRL F to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader To quickly move around within a page press the SPACE bar This turns your cursor into a hand with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen e Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross references to related text Click them to jump to th
105. P m g m g m g m ul E ej9 e w o m e wm N w ES ow o oj ojojoj ojoljojojojojojojojo jo EE EH EM 0 eb E EP D Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the NBG 417N automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application names services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy This is the number of an individual application entry Name This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM QoS Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic Priority This field displays the priority of the application Highest Typically used for voice or video that should be high quality High Typically used for voice or video that can be medium quality Mi
106. PA dts 100 Chapter 9 Hl m 103 RES a o MT 103 S2 DAE OH C HIE DIO io vendat pp UR pP E 103 93 What You Need To KNOW e 104 21 IP Poal Se iaia N abite dba ro d boa and 104 cR eU ect TT 104 NBG 417N User s Guide 13 Table of Contents PELAN I a A aac bosse St ceased ea unsere aetna gant ieu payee garde ata main et rere canteiael eennatontaamraauias 105 Chapter 10 ee S0 OT Lo cic cu E EAS 107 TO LENSES secs saa dave sce Eoo idoatetei diaeta a ck Eidos EL SECRETS EE 107 TOZ VEAL VOU Can DO ROTER 107 10 2 What Yeu Need To KNOW sonuit n titre xk Eu pd dic Rs arbe kac km Ra mc nca dtu S da det d ca Si ca 107 RUE dc cue nic c ree meee eas ORE UNE REC T 108 TOS PAU SEIN sake Nias cate ch caren E P P AP Mi ML UAM D M MEE 108 10 6 Client List Sree osos ies estas cag equa Seer joa numba a pws on dac x So redex ED Fer i E ead Saga 110 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen enne nnne nn nennen n nnn n n nnn nnn n n nnn nnn 113 BN choses bcd aise pense aac cased a 113 11 2 WNA T0 Can Do ccd etusecieati cp pue A Ew adm dde a O a iN 113 AU SOI Pel ELS Ed ERR cmm 114 Wd NATAPPICA SOSEN seisneda apod poop pcd aa ecran ad bp apr Lan rcl 114 11 5 NAT Advanced Screen ou iiccccccccccccccccececceccececeeceeceseceaeeseeeeeceaueusseeeeauauseeesse
107. RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer prot
108. Rename NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items Ej Client for Microsoft Networks m File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks lt Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 7 8 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration fou can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically C Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use
109. S INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes Zlib under the license by Zlib Zlib License zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library version 1 2 2 October 3rd 2004 Copyright C 1995 2004 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly jloup gzip org NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Mark Adler madler alumni caltech edu ZLIB is third party library and has
110. SIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS This Product includes Libupnp 1 6 0 Pcre 6 x and Ppp 2 4 3 under the license by BSD BSD Copyright c dates as appropriate to package The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINES
111. Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you wo
112. Security 802 11 Mode 802 11 b g n WPS Configured Interface Status Rate Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details LAN Down N A was Up 150M Ready NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 19 Status Screen AP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role None WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN On Off or Off by scheduler Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG 417N in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG 417N is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG 417N is using 802 11 M
113. Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POS
114. User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode Table 19 Status Screen AP Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG 417N 5 3 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG 417N features in AP Mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode i Status Wireless LAN LAN System Logs Tools Sys OP Mode Language Figure 26 Menu AP Mode The following table describes the sub menus Table 20 Menu AP Mode LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG 417N s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG 417N to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG 417N Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings QoS Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS St
115. WAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the WAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device WLAN Information IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or None MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN On Off or Off by scheduler Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG 417N in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG 417N is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG 417N is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status System Up Time This is the total time the NBG 417N has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG 417N s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displ
116. Wizard Step 3 Ethernet Connection STEP Fr STEP 2 STEPS fa Internet Configuration Enter your Internet ce Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type Be OM Mex at 4 4 2 PPPoE Connection Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG 417N rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG 417N does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE Figure 17 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE
117. a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 72 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation sumwerwesk RUM T ner SED 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 72 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued sumwErwas ALTERNATIVE LAT OcTET LAST OCTET 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following fi
118. age ihe NBGATIN eic m 22 1 4 Good Habits Tor Managing Ihe NBG AI7N iiie rrr nan i Rer A n 22 EO LES ihnen pt iui aea e ta ey rte EO uH ODE Ld opt i uU tss oe Toor aT 22 Chapter 2 jl 31 7 e K O0 O n 24 EARRCCLI ER 24 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web ConfiguratOt LL na rena nis tana c cn aoaaa Resa ana rm Ane iria Taai 25 ENERO DU uM RTT 25 de Accsselng the Web Loan E OT REDE sse caasa ui qr beet od ago eee E utin bets iu dae breue dtd es bee uit dedbd eed quu iA 25 Jo Peseti me NEGATI m Tr TERT UN ERN 27 3 3 1 Procedure ta Use the Reset Button 22 cuai aia sober orna Ses tank Eo Reda ERR Ida aaa 27 3 A Navigating ibe Web Conhgutatoi e 27 2 salus So Moner MOGE osin aE SA GO daa a ta 27 do MEVIBEIRON P ANTES lt 5 go26c a5 505 Sane Gadd dads en GP PI DN Ete DU LE CM QN ndn FEE CDM LELMUI NM PEU QN NN MEDI NEMUS 30 REO RAMS Mr m 31 Saa a Foker ANSES TTE 32 2 544 Sumnar WLAN Stalon SAUS asenne aea 33 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard REP 35 NBG 417N User s Guide EN Table of Contents d APE a E ea inact nir pode va a ora at bbc dun ra boc me aan reb aint bns aactor fa 25 1 2 Connection Wizard STEP T System WOMANI uua ien ea niron anina iaia 36 E EU i i ee Ee 36 EUER sani I EE DO LL LI 36 4 5 Connection Mizard STEP 2 Wireless LAM sioe titor visor E aERE i Vaca pen Ex EB bu pa 37 4 9 1 Extend WPA PSK ar WPAZ PSK SECHMICU 1er ten roten pne kp L
119. ame System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 68 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION IP Multicast IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The NBG 417N supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 Logging Use logs for troubleshooting You can view logs in the Web Configurator PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The NBG 417N supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play The NBG 417N can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a UPnP network NBG 417N User s Guide 177 Chapter 25 Product Specifications 178 NBG 417N User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on
120. amic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP address Dynamic DNS server Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s auto detect IP Address automatically by the DDNS server It is recommended that you select this option Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a static IP Address address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS NBG 417N User s Guide Firewall 13 1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG 417N and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN By default the firewall e allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks e blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 75 Default Firewall Action 13
121. and so has just one IP address All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address To connect to the Internet another device such as a router is required Figure 110 IP Address in AP Mode LAN 22 4 General Screen Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet Figure 111 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General System Operation Mode Router access Point q Note Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Apply Reset If you select Router Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 112 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General Router The page at http 192 168 1 1 says Ports are LAN 4 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN WAN LAN DHCP server is configurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is configurable e In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet ports have different IP addresses e The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on your local network e The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 1 e You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings NBG 417N User s Guide 165
122. art buttons or button next to the PIN field on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG 417N s WPS Station screen within two minutes The NBG 417N authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG 417N securely NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG 417N and wireless client ex NWD210N in this example by using PIN method Figure 30 Example WPS Process PIN Method Wireless Client NBG 417N Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS statio Push Button Or input station s PIN numi A Note uis H le Continuous Access Mode WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Authentication by PIN numnmmmmmmmmmmm SECURITY INFO Y COMMUNICATION NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG 417N This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG 417N SSID SSID_Example3 Channel 6 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG 417N The instructions require that you
123. ast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get
124. ation Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS Scheduling Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS on your NBG 417N LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode Table 20 Menu AP Mode LINK TAB FUNCTION Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG 417N s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG 417N Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG 417N Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG 417N without turning the power off Sys OP Mode General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer 5 4 Configuring Your Settings Use this section to configure your NBG 417N settings while in AP Mode 5 4 1 LAN Settings Click Network gt LAN to see the screen below Note If you change t
125. ation successful x Q a The Device Is Rebooting e Now After the device finishes rebooting the login screen displays The NBG 417N automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 106 Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG 417N IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix C on page 201 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 107 Configuration Restore Error System Restore Restore configuration error The configuration file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file Click Help for more information Return 21 4 3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the NBG 417N to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG 417N Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button NBG 417N User
126. auauseeeeeusaaeeeeesesauaneuees 117 11 5 1 Tagger Port Forwarding Example sissisotaa ttr Free UL eda EL Lose aaa 118 11 5 2 Two Paints Ta Remember About Trigger Pers icis tion pad Ig i e n iannis 118 Chapter 12 Dynamic 121 1 ELM a eee PE pe px REL e a M BOSE ea LUE M i PET 121 Be hs TOT CUI EO sae EDU PLE MD EE C DM EU 121 12 3 What You Need TG KNOW iiiiasae esa cet eeutku ceca ni Rec rana Seu mtu eu n kenn hae Examen ek vito enam ka ua dk ER Dd mnn 121 ES REV UI e 121 124 Dynamo DNS SOPBEBE aesiesnisidvbebus R Ea d bod qa pools asp D DU abba pa exa Ra d 122 Chapter 13 Frowa d T ATTTTITTOTRI TI CL DELI ai 125 ONES rU RR 125 DUNG CIS IO IE TS IAE P2 NE RR RR 125 13 3 What You Need TO KNOW 2s essactecidd eet b sevens Duk Raid b cma b Sea dg nd e icc tnc a ucc dad 126 153 About the NBC TINI Firewall secasses onneaan o se Ee Eoo ER tans ceo Erste Bot busco t pe cet 126 154 General Frowa Screen niudacument erae on peior bv PE enam colpa CDD 126 13 5 SENLIS OOO satehudscctaeioteteitieit me ue bea inti oet omt d m bus m tH d EA ELE D MO A DEE GE 127 Chapter 14 Content ROTI e 129 EDS Cr ET UN TT T 129 14 25 What You Can DO icc ie tramdteto pit E Dios kr bab Six DE E Bau cula E b EX UBULR dou aaa uis aad d ger 129 103 What You Need TO OW RUM 129 NBG 417N User s Guide Table of Contents TES Carita nit Filller
127. ays what percentage of the NBG 417N s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG 417N is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG 417N is using System Setting Firewall This shows whether the firewall is active or not Bandwidth This shows whether bandwidth management is active or not Management UPnP This shows whether UPnP is active or not Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG 417N port types The port types are WAN LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen Router Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulati
128. bandwidth management rule applies Policy Select Max or Min and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in bits per second in the field below Rate bps Type or select the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed refer to the field above for the rule in bits per second If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 5 3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgr
129. bes the labels in this screen Table 27 Network Wireless LAN General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG 417N even when the NBG 417N is using WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password for authentication Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Type a pre shared key less than 64 case sensitive HEX characters 0 9 A F 76 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 27 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK seconds 30 minutes LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK Update Timer WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA WPA2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 5 MAC Filter T
130. ble Select this check box to have the NBG 417N apply this bandwidth management rule Service This is the name of the service You can also enter the name up to 10 keyboard characters of a service you want to add in the priority queue for example Messenger Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High or Low NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 56 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Specific Port This displays the port s assigned to the service You can also specify the port s to services to which you want to allocate bandwidth Choose either Both TCP or UDP in the drop down menu and enter the port or range of ports in the provided boxes Note If you are entering a specific port and not a range of ports you can either leave the second port field blank or enter the same port number again Bandwidth Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific protocols on Allocation an IP or IP range This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select this check box to have the NBG 417N apply this bandwidth management rule LAN IP Range This displays the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies Direction These read only labels represent uplink or downlink traffic To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN i
131. ble with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 3 1 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 3 1 1 SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 3 1 2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BB C D E and F NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN You can use the MAC address fil
132. bnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of Address your NBG 417N that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG 417N over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes NBG 417N User s Guide Bandwidth Management 16 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application In the figure below uplink traffic goes from the LAN device A to the WAN device B Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device B to the LAN device A
133. ccton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places X9 My Network Places b My Documents Sj My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network Right click on the icon for your NBG 417N and select Invoke The Web Configurator login screen displays Figure 95 Network Connections My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O gt 3 JO search gt gt Folders Ea Address 3 My Network Places Network Tasks a Add a network place View network connections invoke 9 Set up a home or small office network View workgroup computers Create Shortcut Rename Properties Other Places D NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 6 Right click on the icon for your NBG 417N and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG 417N Figure 96 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway poc General mj ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 NBG 417N User s Guide 19 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the System screens System See the chapter about wizard setup for
134. ce the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG 417N can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and or WAN gt Internet Connection screen If the ISP did not give you DNS server information leave the DNS Server fields set to 0 0 0 0 in the Wizard screen and or set to From ISP in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses 4 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses Figure 20 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP3 fi Internet Configuration My WAN IP Address My WAN IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address First DNS Server Second DNS Server NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL Cabl
135. ce or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions NBG 417N User s Guide 265 Appendix F Open Software Announcements You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and
136. cense 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License NBG 417N User s Guide 259 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free
137. communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 142 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they NBG 4
138. creen to block certain web features and sites containing Filter certain keywords in the URL Management Static Route IP Static Use this screen to configure IP static routes Route Remote WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from MGMT which IP address es users can use HTTP to manage the NBG 417N UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG 417N Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG 417N s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG 417N Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG 417N Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG 417N without turning the power off Sys OP Mode General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer 3 5 2 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG 417N s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the NBG 417N provides the TCP IP configura
139. ction 6 3 2 on page 63 EB NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials In the following screen you set the priorities for VoIP and e mail Figure 37 Tutorial Priority Queue Priority Queue a Iv Low NES NEN 2 Iv www 3 Vv TELNET 4 5 6 Iv BitTorrent Low Iv Gaming Low 8 O High Both alll 9 r High Both zl 10 r High Both alll pint r High Both alll 12 O High x Both zl Click Enable for the Vol P SIP service and set priority to High Do the same for E mail For the rest of the applications click Enable if you need these services and set the priority to Low Note You can also leave the Enable field blank for the rest of the applications In doing so the NBG 417N does not apply bandwidth management to these services 6 3 2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom Application Aside from the VOIP and e mail services you need to set the priority for MSN Messenger To do this add the service in the Priority Queue table of the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen Figure 38 Tutorial Adding MSN Messenger to Priority Queue Priority Queue www TELNET a E Mail a VoIP SIP 44a ia tiiadiagiya a BitTorrent Mee s wo co I lt 1 o 4 Gamin s High ce v 1553 10 m High
140. d Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority For example Internet surfing Low Typically used for non critical background applications such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG 417N 7 7 1 Application Priority Configuration Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry Click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Figure 49 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration Application Priority Configuration Name 77 Service User defined Dest Port 165535 Priority Highest Apply Reset See Appendix E on page 243 for a list of commonly used services and destination ports The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Type a description of the application priority NBG 417N User
141. d wireless security settings Release This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured Configuration Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG 417N Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Refresh Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh 7 9 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station tab NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note Note After you click Push Button on this screen you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes To add the second wireless station you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes Figure 51 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network Push Button Or input stations s PIN number Start allow 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Use this button when you use
142. dditional wiring providing easy network access to mobile users You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802 11b g n compatible devices A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing 1 2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NBG 417N e Wired You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG 417N so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet Wireless Wireless clients can connect to the NBG 417N to access network resources e WAN Connect to a broadband modem router for Internet access Figure 1 NBG 417N Network WLAN LAN LAN2 2 fun P z NBG 417N User s Guide at Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG 417N 1 3 Ways to Manage the NBG 417N Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG 417N e WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG 417N using a supported web browser 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG 417N Do the following things regularly to make the NBG 417N more secure and to manage the NBG 417N more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Wri
143. device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide 147 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 18 5 Technical Reference 18 5 1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example 18 5 1 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device The sections show examples of using UPnP This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG 417N Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG 417N Turn on your computer and the NBG 417N Click start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 88 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe Q d Ka Search e Folders E Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway a intei Disable LANorH Status Network Tasks Create anew connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Create Shortcut i Rename this connection View status of this connection E Change settings of this connertion Rename NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 18 Unive
144. dows XP to use it NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 144 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches
145. e Current Time 00 21 06 Current Date 2009 01 01 Time and Date Setup Manual New Time hh mm ss 0 ij p New Date yyyy mm dd 2009 n C Get from Time Server auto User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London O Daylight Savings Start Date First z Sunday z of anuary z 2009 01 04 at EF o clock End Date First z Sunda z of January 2009 01 04 at EF o clock Apply Reset he following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Maintenance System Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG 417N Each time you reload this page the NBG 417N synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG 417N Each time you reload this page the NBG 417N synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually hh mm ss When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this f
146. e Name SSID ZyXEL WPS Security Extend VWPA2 PSK with customized key Channel Selection Channel 11 2462MHz gt RIV ETO enters crac NBG 417N User s Guide 37 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Name SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN If you change this field on the NBG 417N make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Security Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose Auto WPA2 PSK to have the NBG 417N generate a pre shared key automatically After you click Next a screen pops up displaying the generated pre shared key Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network Click OK to continue Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG 417N your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 4 on page 39 Choose Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security to configure a Pre Shared Key Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK respectively If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 3 1 on page 38 Channel The range of radio frequencies us
147. e 23 1 Language Screen Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator display Click the language you prefer The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG 417N Figure 114 Language Language Language Selection English Deutsch Francais Espanol HH Italiano Bf e NBG 417N User s Guide 167 Chapter 23 Language NBG 417N User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e NBG 417N Access and Login nternet Access e Resetting the NBG 417N to Its Factory Defaults e Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting 24 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The NBG 417N does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG 417N 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG 417N and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG 417N 4 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 22 2 Check the hardware connections See t
148. e downlink To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN i e uplink Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG 417N forwards to both the LAN and the WAN Port Range This displays the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies Policy This displays either Max maximum or Min minimum and refers to the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second in the field below Rate This is the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed refer to the field above for the rule in bits per second Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen See Section 16 5 2 on page 141 for more information Click the Remove icon to delete a rule Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 5 1 Priority Levels Traffic with a higher priority gets through faster while traffic with a lower priority is dropped if the network is congested The following describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG 417N forwards out through an interface High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Low This is typically used for all other traffic that are not time sensitive EJ NBG
149. e Fill out the table of the Bandwidth Management Type you selected in Section 16 4 on page 137 138 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen Figure 84 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Unlimited Priority Queue Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 q Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Priority Queue 1 r FTP Hion z 2 m www High z 3 r TELNET Hon gt 4 rH E Mail Hion z 5 rH VoIP SIP Hion z 6 O BitTorrent Hion z 7 oO Gaming Hion z 9 r ren fem 10 r EN Hon ens 1 r Lo Hon en z x Bandwidth Allocation DETTERTCTITUNSECTTUUNSEECTITTONERCUUN RC TRACTA i n EP 2 O EP s n EP Og 4 D g i sir BPO e Fr EA a a g wf s O EP e O EP I io 7 EP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Queue Local IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which bandwidth management does not apply Priority Queue Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre defined service This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Ena
150. e corresponding section of the User s Guide PDF Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG 417N up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Supporting Disc The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information e Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan NBG 417N User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com TT TT Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File e Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product e Knowledge Base If you have a specif
151. e such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside the
152. e FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver NBG 417N User s Guide 273 Appendix G Legal Information 274 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Radiation Exposure Statement e This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e IEEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 e To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons Industry Canada Statem
153. e Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modi
154. e area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points e Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible NBG 417N User s Guide EB Appendix D Wireless LANs For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area NBG 417N User s Guide Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers e Name This is a short descriptive name
155. e c kno etia Rp E ee Ra pa USER MM E cU 38 4 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration seesessssssssssssseseeeee nennen 39 tit I MO 8 tc et si E 40 242 Bo ad ag ae gigs eI S ceto Db ere treet p rea erent d ed dd estas nr aci rad Pesce ad e a id 40 eS tr DESIT aaa oett pumu eux e abl Mu End Goal f us 41 43 40 Your IPC OBS iie iiia ee toca uinea OO 42 34 5 WAN IP Addiess FINN 2222 isadzrngterisandeest Inpede ua devi agas a ac Y vai uada 43 44 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask smiecie te paviioEP Res add oor E UT gab e Qu Rug Pene lade be uH Gago RR NN GRE ARE 43 Aur DNS Server Address ASSINET sinirini oa hala Ne rase aiaa aa 44 4 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeeaes 44 AG AIAG PRISE sirinin hee pe ep Ut Chus Bed tg patus bes dnb ee da nb TEM FERE 45 zem srsgEUiriciFingur M SEES 47 Chapter 5 AP po eM 49 NESCIUS E LISTES mme ETE 49 52 Bad our BEC 417N 10 BS ii creen ide tata IR va e RE Ecce ttt puce emi eic E ERR du eun d Dna 49 aeto Sese c iare PRENDE 50 D Naviga FP abl s5 c eicudretable pep Qon PED DIN I gie i em MP PUM ege uua neu QN e MM RU D 52 er REV IONIN ES WUE US NEL LT LT 53 MNA Ee T TETTE T UU T T I magataaadabaakuands 53 54 2 WLAN and Mahtenance SOUND ccoaccccie e Lote k odere saper East ptu c Leer AS a 54 5 5 Logging in te ihe Web Configurator in
156. e copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend th
157. e copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and tellin
158. e modem or router My WAN IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in this field Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field System DNS Server Address Assignment if applicable DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG 417N uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server First DNS Server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server you must use IP addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 9 WAN MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Table 17 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 32 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway or default route 192 168 1 1 NBG 417N LAN IP This screen allows users to configure the WAN port
159. ecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission ascii Hex o Key 1 o Key 2 o Key 3 o Key 4 q Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 26 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption Encryption Authentication This field is activated when you select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP in the WEP Method Encryption field Select Auto Open System or Shared Key from the drop down list box This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client Keep this setting at Auto or Open System unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the ZyXEL Device occurs Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding Ox that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically NBG 417N User s Guide 75 Chapter 7 Wire
160. ect Properties LAN or High Seesd Internet MI Loca Collapse group Left Arrow A Cotte Int Expand all groups nte Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Connect using La Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items amp Client for Microsoft Networks de Network Monitor Driver e File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Interg REN Tea PAP ve Link Layer Topology Discovery apper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks NBG 417N User s Guide 207 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 9 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens Internet Protocol Version 4 ICP IPv4 Properties EAA General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherw
161. ed LAN 1 4 Green On The NBG 417N has a successful 10 100MB Ethernet connection Blinking The NBG 417N is sending receiving data through the off The LAN is not connected WPS Button Press this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi Protected Setup with another WPS enabled client You must press the WPS button on the af client side within 120 seconds for a successful connection NBG 417N User s Guide The WPS Button 2 1 Overview Your NBG 417N supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves For more information on using WPS see Section 6 2 1 on page 55 NBG 417N User s Guide Introducing the
162. ed by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called a Selection channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving Note The wireless stations and NBG 417N must use the same SSID channel ID WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled or WPA2 PSK if WPA2 PSK is enabled for wireless communication 4 3 1 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security Choose Extend WPA PSK or Extend WPA2 PSK security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 14 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security STEP T STEP 2 STEP 3 fa wireless LAN users and ma key a k The p lt d be at g f both lett id numbe is pr are recommended to be different from word you use to this ter E g to your ISP Pre Shared Key awerty1234 Q ascii 9 Hex ru 38 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII or HEX characters You can set up the most Key secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Back Click Back to display
163. egistered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to NBG 417N User s Guide EB Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your NBG 417N but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG 417N will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG 417N unless you are instructed to do otherwise 4 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instan
164. eless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen See 7 4 2 and 7 4 3 sections Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication Note If you enable the WPS function only No Security WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are available in this field NBG 417N User s Guide 73 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 7 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG 417N your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 43 Network Wireless LAN General No Security Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL I Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz z Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 6 Channel Width Auto 20 40 MHz z Security Security Mode No Security qQ Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enab
165. eless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Select this check box for the NBG 417N to automatically choose the channel with the least interference Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section field This displays the channel the NBG 417N is currently using Channel Width Select whether the NBG 417N uses a wireless channel width of 20 or 40 MHz A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels select Auto 20 40MHz to allow the NBG 417N to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to add security on this wir
166. ement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties NOTE Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy modify and redistribute the software For at least three 3 years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution a complete machine readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose
167. enna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz or 5GHz is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverag
168. ense We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Less
169. ent This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions this device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication IMPORTANT NOTE IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator amp your body Hm I Ej GOR BIRERE PETERET ERA ZB pd KANER aE CREA JERESTHI gt Zr ARER IIE eK gt HUA ae rt ie T ERE PETUR EAA eZ A ee RE ST EO of EEL NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information
170. entication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users e Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication e Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting
171. er General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application p
172. er s Guide 223 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST Ka san O O y F3 Applications a Administrator Settings Install Software System Information 1 f System Folders Home Folder 2 My Documents Ev Network Folders A Media 2 46 Media 2 0 GB available xw wO Favorites Applications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Run as root KDE su A C Please enter the Administrator root Ta password to continue Command sbin yast2 Password Ignore X Cancel 224 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon YaST Control Center linux h20z File Edit Help D Software e Network Card Network Devices C fad Network Services 49 Novell AppArmor Security and Users Miscellaneous 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button vasr2Glinux h2oz Network Card 9 Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Options Overview Ho
173. es and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the NBG 417N Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your NBG 417N that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG 417N will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG 417N unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0
174. etwork Address Translation Default Server Setup Server IP Address fo o00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network gt NAT gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Setup Enable Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol Address address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a Translation local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Select the check box to enable NAT Default Server Setup Server IP In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A Address default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the NBG 417N discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 4 NAT Application Screen Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the ES NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT local IP address of the de
175. etwork disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 102 Network Temporarily Disconnected d Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 103 Upload Error Message system Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return 160 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 21 4 Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next Figure 104 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the Password will be 1234
176. fied Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with t
177. for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 201 e Windows Vista on page 205 e Windows 7 on page 209 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 213 e Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 on page 216 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 219 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 223 Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 2 3 Click Start gt Control Panel e Internet Explorer eA My Documents 3 Outlook Express E My Recent Documents gt W Paint cA My Pictures 99i Files and Settings Transfer W gt x BY Command Prompt e My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 I My Computer Tour Windows xP Vl Windows Movie Maker tg Printers and Faxes Q9 Help and Support All Programs gt 177 Run B Log Off Turn OFF Computer start untitled Paint In the Control Panel click the Network Connections icon E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q d DO search gt Folders fal G Control Panel Address V Control Panel Qe Switch to Category view See Also Game Controllers Windows Update Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties ocal Area Connection nabled L a Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut
178. formation without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 124 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 125 Internet Options Security i 2x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify i
179. g the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided
180. ge for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge C Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the 266 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered
181. gn a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Password Setup Change your NBG 417N s password recommended using the fields as shown Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 19 System 19 4 Time Setting Screen To change your NBG 417N s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the NBG 417N s time based on your local time zone Figure 98 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting Time Setting Current Time and Dat
182. gram the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
183. gure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 116 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Mmmm i I 4 I i I 3 I E I A P l i i i i E I E 8 I 4 L 192 168 1 0 24 i 3 a errr tT eet You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 117 Subnetting Example After Subnetting v i 5 i Ja i i i 3 i i R M ir 4 V 192 168 1 0 25 F 192 168 1 128 25 Nannen e oum um um um um um um o In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Exa
184. h or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License t
185. he IP address of the NBG 417N in the screen below you will need to log into the NBG 417N again using the new IP address Figure 27 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP IP Address 192 158 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The table below describes the labels in the screen Table 21 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get from DHCP Select this to let the DHCP server in the gateway assign the NBG 417N IP address Server User Defined Select this to give the NBG 417N a static IP address LAN IP IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notatiion The default setting is 192 168 1 2 If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG Mask 417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG 417N Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode e See Wireless LAN 69 for information on the configuring your wireless netwo
186. he MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG 417N to give exclusive access to up to 16 devices Allow or exclude up to 16 devices from accessing the NBG 417N Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen To change your NBG 417N s MAC filter settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 46 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter MAC Filter MAC Address Filter active Filter Action allow C peny se MAC Address Apply Reset CPO sn ni alae wlni eo N w a ow a NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 28 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the NBG 417N MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG 417N Select Allow to permit access to the NBG 417N MAC addresses not listed will be denied acces
187. he Quick Start Guide 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the NBG 417N 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 24 2 NBG 417N Access and Login I don t know the IP address of my NBG 417N 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the NBG 417N by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG 417N it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser Set your device to Router Mode login see the Quick Start Guide for instructions and go to the Device I nformation table in the Status screen Your NBG 417N s IP address is available in the Device I nformation table e If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None your device has a fixed IP address e If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network 3 If your NBG 417N is a DHCP client you can find your IP address from the DHCP server This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network Find this i
188. he connection wizard will walk you through the most common configuration options This v een broken down into three steps each of which may have multiple pages This wizard will take you through the following steps n Information Setup 4 2 Connection Wizard STEP 1 System Information System Information contains administrative and system related information 4 2 1 System Name System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name e In Windows 95 98 click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name e In Windows 2000 click Start gt Settings and Control Panel and then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name e In Windows XP click Start gt My Computer gt View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the NBG 417N System Name 4 2 2 Domain Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the NBG 417N via DHCP
189. he field to the right displays the read only DNS Second DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address Address by using the NBG 417N s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is address IP successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file It will not Address change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the
190. he major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 258 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link wit
191. hey do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this Li
192. ic question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products e Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office e Product model and serial number e Warranty Information e Date that you received your device 4 NBG 417N User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions e The NBG 417N may be referred to as the NBG 417N the device the product or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font e A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or
193. id uR Xias gp ua M EI ptu rA Rd 113 Donan DNS aria a Uo a a a boule Nati ou dL LES a eu 121 311 ON 125 CISA TICES accidit cao gc e dE Ren bo Rd ape abd adeo ax au ptr DR beta Fx Dc 129 uersa EE 133 Bandwidth NUI rer pr fett 136 ciui AR Mr EE EL E LET OD TT m 143 UGA crests Ul Ful B PIE UPE aa tei aa Erie ilc o De renee erry emer Pro ape EQUI ep pim a in reer rrr rertrr tree tre errrce 146 ALT NET UT T MEMO 153 fioc mcr AN A E A A 157 TOOLS e 199 CORN MOE ETT 164 ps c M E 167 Bio asD m M 169 gis Medo oe n ERN 175 NBG 417N User s Guide 9 Contents Overview NBG 417N User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Dis WII 2L ieee 3 Document CU 5 Saleh Wa A BN EE M 7 Conten Eg 10 ocina a a ne a a a eee nr a 9 pro 1049 00 is EE cc deck Lec tecnica aa aaaea 11 Part E Users Ici eee 19 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG 417NW ieuiuuciseiasuc cse enia se ania ntt an tn accu eda pna a untuk Ya sc apa nku ades aaa kein Ra s enun 21 ARCU T 21 pP ues mer 21 13 Ways 1o Man
194. ield and then click Apply NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 62 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually yyyy mm dd When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Select this radio button to have the NBG 417N get the time and date from the Server time server you specified below Auto Select Auto to have the NBG 417N automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply User Defined Time Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL Server Address up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight
195. in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square r
196. independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchan
197. int to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG 417N rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG 417N does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access 96 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation Figure 60 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Service Name YT optional User Name OO Password NEN Retype to Confirm 3 Vv Nailed Up Connec
198. ir relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any pri
199. ireless clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP key e Select Auto to have the NBG 417N allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption The NBG 417N authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key ASCII HEX The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG 417N and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission Keys 1 to 4t If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure all four keys but only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 7 11 2 Security Mode WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Use this screen to configure the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security for your NBG 417N when it is in AP Bridge or Bridge Only mode Figure 55 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Seneral J mac Fiter Advanced J Qos wes J wps station scheduling ME WDS Setup Basic Setting Disable Local MAC Address 00 13 49 f5 18 c5 Remote MAC Address p0 00 00 00 00 00 Security Security Mode WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key Apply Refresh 88 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the label
200. is provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS NBG 417N User s Guide 263 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything w
201. ise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 5 Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically i Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced Emme Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise 1 Click Start gt Control Panel ES Snipping Tool Cs Calculator lt a XPS Viewer ap Windows Fax and Sca
202. ith it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used a
203. itional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions NBG 417N User s Guide 267 Appendix F Open Software Announcements When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices di
204. its own license files under src acdk vfile zlib are published under following Copyright and license zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library version 1 1 3 July 9th 1998 Copyright C 1995 1998 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup qgzip org madler alumni caltech edu The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFCs Request for Comments 1950 to 1952 in the files ftp ds internic net rfc rfc1950 txt zlib format rfc1951 txt deflate format and rfc1952 txt gzip format This Product includes Gcc under the license by GPL v3 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007
205. k in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status packet specific statistics and the system up time The Poll I nterval s field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen Figure 7 Summary Packet Statistics Packet Statistics roe tts arte an Tatra bata 100M 876235 809818 0 m 150 100M 810753 886992 1676 WLAN 3019 System Up Time 1 41 47 Poll Interval sec Stop NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Summary Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the NBG 417N s port type Status For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays Down when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Tx B s This displays the transmission
206. karu direkcijas Vairak inform cijas http www esd lv Notes 1 Although Norway Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states the EU Directive 1999 5 EC has also been implemented in those countries 2 The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP The EIRP level in dBm of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used specified in dBi to the output power available at the connector specified in dBm NBG 417N User s Guide 279 Appendix G Legal Information NBG 417N User s Guide Index A Address Assignment 92 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 237 Alert 157 alternative subnet mask notation 181 antenna directional 241 gain 241 omni directional 241 AP 21 AP access point 231 AP Mode menu 52 overview 49 status screen 50 AP Bridge 21 Auto bridge 101 Backup configuration 161 Bandwidth management overview 136 priority 140 services 142 Basic Service Set See BSS 229 BitTorrent 142 Bridge Repeater 21 BSS 229 C CA 236 Certificate Authority See CA I ndex certifications 273 notices 275 viewing 275 Channel 29 51 channel 70 231 interference 231 Configuration backup 161 reset the factory defaults 162 restore 161 content filtering 129 by keyword in URL 129 by web feature 129 copyright 273 CPU usage 29 51 CTS Clear to Send 232 D Daylight saving 156 DDNS 121 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 122 DHCP 31
207. le D active Service Name fee aS User Defined gt Local Port Range C 7 Public Port Range m L Server IP Address L e Apply Reset Application Rules Summary tive Start End Port start Port End Port Port OPO ws Al al sal wlnie a Gd GG A GG GG GL ER EH E E EH EM E 0 E9 ed EB q NBG 417N User s Guide ns Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT The following tabl Table 47 Network e describes the labels in this screen gt NAT gt Application LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Application Ru le Active Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Service Name Type a name of up to 31 printable characters to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name Otherwise select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name The predefined service name and port number s will display in the Service Name and Port fields Local Port Range Public Port Range Type a port number s to be forwarded To specify a range of ports enter a hyphen between the first port and the last port such as 10 20 To specify two or more non consecutive p
208. led Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Your NBG 417N allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 44 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL I Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 6 Channel Width Auto 20 40 MHz Security Security Mode Static WEP ov WEP Encryption 64 bit WEP Authentication Method Open System Y q Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexad
209. less LAN Table 26 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG 417N and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 45 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK PEER oce reme p e p wes J wes station J scheduling wos Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 6 Channel Width Auto 20 40 MHz z Security Security Mode WPA2 PSK DI wea Compatible Pre Shared Key asci C Hex Group Key Update Timer 600 In Seconds q Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Reset The following table descri
210. lows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering You can also subscribe to category based content filtering that allows your NBG 417N to check web sites against an external database Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the NBG 417N Wireless LAN Scheduler You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled disabled Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG 417N You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic DNS Support Use this feature to have the NBG 417N assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network With Dynamic DNS Domain N
211. me and end time will mean the whole day Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 11 WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System is a wireless connection between two or more APs Use this screen to set the operating mode of your NBG 417N to AP Bridge or Bridge Only and establish NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG 417N and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS tab The following screen opens with the Basic Setting set to Disabled and Security Mode set to No Security Figure 53 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS WDS Setup Basic Setting Disable Local MAC Address 00 BB 97 53 03 40 Remote MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Security Security Mode No Security Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Setup Basic Settings Select the operating mode for your NBG 417N e AP Bridge The NBG 417N functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously e Bridge The NBG 417N acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes
212. mong developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding 264 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to requir
213. mple Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 73 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Tite aaa IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Example Table 73 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 74 Subnet 2 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER vn acia IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 75 Subnet 3
214. n Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network System e Preferences F Authorizations o Hal T E Hardware Drivers elp and Suppo About GNOME G About Ubuntu Hardware Testing ISl Language Support i Login Window Quit Bis 2 Network Tools NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 3 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Network Settings ia Location Connections General DNS Hosts B Point to point connec This network interface is not c In the Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button e Authenticate x E fo System policy prevents modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action amp CJ chris gt Details E cancel 4 Authenticate gt H NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Inthe Network Setti
215. n Magnifier Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support gt All Programs 2 Inthe Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and I nternet category SB Control Panel Adjust your computer s settings System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Ne k and x View network status and task cose homegroup and sharing options jd t Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Programs Uninstall a program View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety 9 Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution ay Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language MR Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Add a device 3 Click Change adapter settings Manage wireless networks a A Change adapter settings siete Change advanced sharing This computer settings View your active networks ZyXEL com Work network ET ET GO E gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v p Search Control Panel Home A 2 A View your basic network information and
216. n a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 Ma
217. nable DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details Ready The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION amp Click this icon to open the setup wizard Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator Refresh Interval 20 seconds v statistics Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen Refresh Now Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen Router Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name Firmware Version This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes This is the firmware version and the date created NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen Router Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the
218. nce User Accounts Classic View e Wi C E i Get started with Windows Change account type Security Ay Check for updates Allow a program through Windows Firewall etwork and Internet A Connect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks L Change keyboards or other input methods Set up file sharing Change display language Click the Network and Sharing Center icon CION gt Control Panel Network and Internet p v 41 Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home 7 p Aa Network and Sharing Center nnect to a network System and Maintenance 5 View network computers and devices Add a deviceto the network Set up file sharing Security Network and Internet pelea ies 7M Internet Options Hardware and Sound Connecttotheinternet Changeyourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections CION P3 Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v gt File Edit View Tools Help Tasks 4 a Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a cannectinn or network A d 9t Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer aj Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then sel
219. nd is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright NBG 417N User s Guide 247 Appendix F Open Software Announcements The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law trade secret law international treaty provisions and the applicable national laws of each respective country All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License you may not market co brand and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the
220. ndwidth Allocation Example Bandwidth Allocation Setup D Active Direction Both hd LAN IP Range 192 168 1 1 1192 168 1 33 Protocol TCP E Port Range 7070 Policy mn gt Rate Kbps 30M Apply Reset Enter the following values for each service you want to add For this tutorial you need to add each of the following service see table below and click Apply Table 22 Services and Values SERVICES FIELDS REAL AUDIO RTSP VDO LIVE FTP Active Check this to turn on this bandwidth management rule Direction Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the Select To WAN NBG 417N forwards to both the LAN and the WAN LAN IP Range Enter 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 Enter 192 168 1 34 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Table 22 Services and Values SERVICES FIELDS REAL AUDIO RTSP VDO LIVE FTP Protocol TCP TCP or UDP TCP TCP Port Range 7070 554 7000 20 21 Policy Min Max Rate Select 30M as the minimum bandwidth allowed Select 64K Apply Click this to add the rule to the Bandwidth Allocation table After adding these services go to Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced and check if you have the correct values Figure 40 Tutorial Bandwidth Allocation Example Bandwidth Allocation LAN IP Range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 Policy Direction Port Range Modify 192 168 1 1
221. ne example is Microsoft s Xbox Live which uses port 3074 As of this writing your NBG 417N supports Xbox Playstation Battlenet and MSN Game Zone 16 5 4 Services and Port Numbers See Appendix E on page 243 for commonly used services and port numbers NBG 417N User s Guide 17 Remote Management 17 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which NBG 417N interface if any from which computers You may manage your NBG 417N from a remote location via e LAN only e LAN and WAN Note When you configure remote management to allow management from the LAN and WAN in the options above you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules 17 2 What You Can Do Use the WWW screen Section 17 4 on page 144 to change your NBG 417N s World Wide Web settings 17 3 What You Need To Know To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17 3 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when 1 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens 2 The IP address in the Secured Client IP Add
222. nformation directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information 4 Reset your NBG 417N to change all settings back to their default This means your current settings are lost See Section 24 4 on page 173 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG 417N I forgot the password 1 The default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 24 4 on page T73 I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address Section 9 4 on page 105 use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I don t know the IP address of my NBG 417N 170 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix B on page 189 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG 417N If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG 417N skip this step e If there is a DHCP server on your network make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Appendix C on page 201 e
223. ng Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding Figure 73 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Jane s computer J Real Audio Server 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG 417N to record Jane s computer IP address The NBG 417N associates Jane s computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The NBG 417N forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The NBG 417N times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol 11 5 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG 417N and going to the outside NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 2 Ifan application needs a continuous data stream that port range will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can t trigger it NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT NBG 417N User s Guide Dynamic DNS 12 1 Overview Dynamic DNS DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address 12 2 What You Can Do Use the Dynamic DNS screen
224. ngle LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The NBG 417N records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the NBG 417N s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol incoming port the NBG 417N forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application To change your NBG 417N s trigger port settings click Network gt NAT gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Note Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time Figure 72 Network gt NAT gt Advanced Port Triggering Rules ee e Start Port End Port Start Port End Port 1 um a z __ EE 2 OL __ 3 ez D d __ 4 1 5 __ Ll __ __ __ 6 __ d Ej 7 E mmm W __ 8 __ L 1 9 EE _
225. ngs window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Network Settings tocation i8 8 Connections General DNS Hosts Point to point connec This network interface is not c tj end Properties x Connection Settings IP address Subnet mask Gateway address e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen NBG 417N User s Guide 221 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided fe Netwonesernnge E E B Location Connections l General DNS Hosts DNS Servers F Add w Delete F Add w Delete P Help s unlock Close Search Domains 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes 222 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System g
226. not find tw news 14 4 Filter Screen Use this screen to restrict web features add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer Click Security gt Content Filter to open the Filter screen Figure 78 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter Keyword Blocking Enable URL Keyword Blocking Keyword Add Keyword List Maximum 20 records Delete Clear au Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable URL The NBG 417N can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in Keyword Blocking the domain name or IP address For example if the keyword bad was enabled all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked e g URL http www website com bad html would be blocked Select this check box to enable this feature Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 64 characters Wildcards are not allowed You can also enter a numerical IP address Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower bo
227. nstalled the utility open it If you cannot see your utility s icon on your screen go to Start gt Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears The utility displays a list of APs within range as shown in the example screen below NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Select SSID Example3 and click Connect Figure 33 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t ZyXEL YZU ZyXEL test E Site Information Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 Channel amp Security WPA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 5 Select WPA PSK and type the security key in the following screen Click Next Figure 34 Security Settings gt Encryption Type gt Pre Shared Key WPA PSK w ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next aj Exit Security Settings 6 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Figure 35 Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID gt Network Type gt Network Mode gt Channel gt Security SSID Example3 Infrastructure 802 11b g Auto WPA PSK Back Save a Exit Confirm Save NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection see the Troubleshooting section of this User
228. nternet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service 13 4 General Firewall Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG 417N s firewall and set up firewall logs Click Security gt Firewall to open the General screen Figure 76 Security Firewall General Firewall Setup M Enable Firewall Apply Reset NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The NBG 417N performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again 13 5 Services Screen If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG 417N an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the NBG 417N exists Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG 417N when unsupported ports
229. nternet but I cannot open my network folders In the Network gt LAN gt Advanced screen make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure If you still cannot access a network folder make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open I can access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode When you change from router mode to AP mode your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 Refer to Appendix C on page 201 for instructions on how to change your computer s IP address 174 NBG 417N User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the NBG 417N s hardware and firmware features Table 67 Hardware Features Dimensions W x D x H 140 mm x 110 mm x 30 mm Weight 190g Power Specification Input 120 240 AC 50 60 Hz Output 12 VDC 1A Ethernet ports Auto negotiating 10 Mbps 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables 4 5 Port Switch You can use either straight through or crossover Ethernet cables MDI MDI X support to connect multiple computers or servers for example game servers in your network to the NBG 417N You can add up to four computers to the NBG 417N without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port You
230. nternet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type User Name Password Server IP Address Connection ID Name Getautomatically from ISP Default Use fixed IP address My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Beck Next gt ext NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 13 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop down list box To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field It must follow the Name c id and n name format For example C 12 or N My ISP This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP Get automatically Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address from ISP Use fixed IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG 417N a fixed address unique IP address My IP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP My IP Subne
231. o configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 82 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data
232. o find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web NBG 417N User s Guide EJ Appendix E Services Table 84 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBIOS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is used for communication between TCP UDP 138 computers in a LAN TCP UDP 139 TCP UDP 445 NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program
233. obally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The NBG 417N keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 69 NAT Example NAT TABLE WAN Public IP pe LAN 192 168 1 10 182 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 12 192 168 1 13 182 188 1 1 A NS ee ut 192 168 1 10 INTERNE 192 168 1 11 Do 192 168 1 10 QD For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT Note You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG 417N 11 2 What You Can Do e Use the General screen Section 11 3 on page 114 to enable NAT and set a default server NBG 417N User s Guide 113 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT e Use the Application screen Section 11 4 on page 114 to change your NBG 417N s port forwarding settings e Use the Advanced screen Section 11 5 on page 117 to change your NBG 417N s trigger port settings 11 3 General NAT Screen Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server Click Network gt NAT to open the General screen Figure 70 Network gt NAT gt General NAT Setup M Enable N
234. ocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port number is specified in the application UDP user defined NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix E Services NBG 417N User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for NBG 417N WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED HOWEVER CERTAIN ZYXEL S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN IN PART SOME THIRD PARTY S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY RUN DISTRIBUTE MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY S LICENSES OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FR
235. ode This shows the IEEE 802 11 standard that the NBG 417N supports Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG 417N WPS This shows the WPS WiFi Protected Setup Status Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status System Uptime This is the total time the NBG 417N has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG 417N s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG 417N s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG 417N is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG 417N is using Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG 417N port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN port this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary NBG 417N
236. ol Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks NBG 417N User s Guide 2n Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens gt Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP v4 Properties x General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 7 Obtain an IP address automatically IP address 192 188 Li 7 Subnet mask DO ake B Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit PETS 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties wind
237. on European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union 276 Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive Compliance Information for 2 4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive Czech ZyXEL t mto prohla uje ze tento za zen je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 EC Danish Undertegnede ZyXEL erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr udstyr overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF German Hiermit erkl rt ZyXEL dass sich das Ger t Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EU befindet Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele English Hereby ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Spanish Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Greek ME THN MAPOYZA ZyXE
238. on This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG 417N 3 5 1 Navigation Panel Use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG 417N features The following table describes the sub menus Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG 417N s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG 417N to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG 417N Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS Scheduling U
239. onger than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG 417N 3 Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG 417N back to its factory default configurations 3 4 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode 3 5 Status Screen Router Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 5 on page 50 Figure 5 Status Screen Router Mode Device Information System Name Firmware Version WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP S LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address Status Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS ZyXEL V1 00 BFM 2 B2 00 AA 97 53 00 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client 00 BB 97 53 03 40 192 168 1 17 255 255 255 0 Server D0 BB 97 53 03 40 On ZyXEL NBG 417N 6 6 No Security 802 11 b g n Configured Refresh Interval None System Status System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Bandwidth Management UPnP E Refresh Now 2 8 9 2009 01 01 02 36 28 p ee Enable Enable E
240. oots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of thi
241. operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party and makes no warranty express implied or statutory whatsoever with respect thereto Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by
242. oprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriat
243. or Internet Access Connection Type Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The NBG 417N supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN Table 40 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Nailed up Connection Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG 417N automatically disconnects from the PPTP server PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Domain Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Name Type your identification name for the PPTP server Get automatically from ISP Select this option If your ISP did no
244. ort numbers separate them by a comma without spaces such as 123 567 Server IP Address Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port s specified in the Port field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table Reset Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one Application Rules S ummary This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled Name This field displays a name to identify this rule Local Start End Port Public Start End Port Server IP Address This field displays the port number s This field displays the inside IP address of the server Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule Click the Remove icon to delete a rule NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 5 NAT Advanced Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a si
245. ou have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG 417N s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is address IP successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file It will not Address change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG 417N supports PPPoE Po
246. oups The Web is accessed through use of a browser WWW uses port 80 Telnet Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems Telnet uses port 23 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 SMTP port 25 VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 BitTorrent BitTorrent is a free P2P peer to peer sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889 BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself It distributes files by corporation and trading that is the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file Gaming Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology O
247. oving the NBG 417N closer to the AP if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on Reboot the NBG 417N If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestion e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 24 4 Resetting the NBG 417N to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG 417N you lose all of the changes you have made The NBG 417N re loads its default settings and the password resets to 1234 You have to make all of your changes again You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button To reset the NBG 417N 1 Make sure the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG 417N 3 Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG 417N back to its factory default configurations If the NBG 417N restarts automatically wait for the NBG 417N to finish restarting and log in to the Web Configurator The password is 1234 If the NBG 417N does not restart automatically disconnect and reconnect the NBG 417N s power Then follow the directions above again 24 5 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting I cannot access the NBG 417N or ping any comp
248. ow Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER 212 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences W Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down NBG 417N User s Guide 213 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon ean System Preferences gt q Personal gH o E a oo Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware t i gt A 0 Ww y p Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse e e a B QuickTime Sharing 8 B e Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure eoo Network J a gt Show ail Q Location Automatic Show Network Status
249. ower Level Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor EIRP mW NBG 417N User s Guide 277 Appendix G Legal Information 2400 2483 5 100 V 5150 5350 200 V 5470 5725 1000 V Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications BIPT must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters Please check http www bipt be for more details Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie BIPT Zie http www bipt be voor meer gegevens Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en ext rieur d une distance sup rieure 300 m tres doivent tre notifi es l Institut Belge des services Postaux et des T l communications IBPT Visitez http www ibpt be pour de plus amples d tails Denmark In Denmark the band 5150 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage I Danmark m frekvensbandet 5150 5350 ogs anvendes udend rs France For 2 4 GHz the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 2483 5 MHz There are no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2 4 GHz band Check http www arcep fr for more details Pour la bande 2 4 GHz la puissance est limit e 10 mW en p i r e pour les quipements utilis s en ext rieur dans la bande 2454
250. performance within mixed wireless modes Select Auto to let the NBG 417N determine whether to turn this feature on or off in the current environment Tx Power This field controls the transmission power of the NBG 417N When using the NBG 417N with a notebook computer select a lower transmission power level when you are close to the AP in order to conserve battery power Enable Intra A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients BSS Traffic or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 7 Quality of Service QoS Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service such as e mail VoIP or FTP a priority level 79 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen appears Figure 48 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Qos QoS Setup WMM QoS Policy Application Priority g m E E EP Ww g Ww E
251. plays the IP address relative to the field listed above Host Name This field displays the computer host name MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select this check box in the DHCP Setup section to have the NBG 417N always assign the IP address es to the MAC address es and host name s After you click Apply the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen where you can edit them Apply Click Apply to save your settings Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server n2 NBG 417N User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG 417N NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet For example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets NAT maps private local IP addresses to gl
252. r Bonding Devices D Dynamic Address DHCP i Statically assigned IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname IL jl Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided YaST2 linux h20z Enter the name for a Network Settings this computer and the DNS domain that it j belongs to Global Options Overview Hostname DNS J Routing Optionally enter the m Hostname and Domain Name name server list and Hostname Domain Name domain search list linux h2oz site Note that the _ Change Hostname via DHCP _ Write Hostname to etc hosts hostname is global it applies to all interfaces not just this one X Change etc resolv conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List The domain is Name Server 1 Domain Search especially important if 10 0 2 3 this computer is a mail server Name Server 2 If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whethe
253. r hardware is connected see the Quick Start Guide and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection see Section 3 2 on page 25 1 Open the Wireless LAN General screen in the NBG 417N s Web Configurator 2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected 3 Enter SSID Example3 as the SSID and select a channel 4 Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply Figure 31 Tutorial Network Wireless LAN General Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID SSID_Example3 Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz T Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 1 Channel Width Auto 20 40 MHz Security Security Mode WPA PSK Pre Shared Key IThisismA P A PSKpre sharedke ascu C Hex Group Key Update Timer 180 In Seconds a Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Reset NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Figure 32 Tutorial Status Screen ZyXEL Wireless LAN DHCP Server NAT DDNS Firewall Content Filter Static Route Remote MGMT UPnP System Logs Tools Sys OP Mode Language gt Status Device Information System Name Firmware Version WAN Information MAC
254. r s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 3 1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG 417N which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the NBG 417N to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG 417N tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG 417N can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways The
255. r to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your host which can be _ Update DNS data via DHCP seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect 4 to different networks Name Server 3 vj 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation Figure 138 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager i Disable Wireless 44 KNetworkManager v Ey Wired Devices 3 Switch to Offline Mode X Wired Network T Show Connection Information Ei Dial Up Connections amp Configure X Options NBG 417N User s Guide 227 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 139 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager Device Addressek Statistics Received Transmitted Bytes 2317441 841875 MBytes 2 2 0 8 Packets 3621 3140 Errors 0 0 Dropped 0 0 KBytes s 0 0 0 0 NBG 417N User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LA
256. ras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 EC NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information Slovenian ZyXEL izjavlja da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 EC Slovak ZyXEL t mto vyhlasuje e zariadenia sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 EC Finnish ZyXEL vakuuttaa t ten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Swedish H rmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning st r I verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EC Bulgarian C Hacrosuijoro ZyXEL aeknapnpa ue TOBa O60pyABaHe e B CbOTBeTCTBMe CbC CblljecTBeHuTe uW3uckBaHMs n Apyrure npnnoxnmn pasnopez6ure Ha AnupektusBa 1999 5 EC Icelandic H r me l sir ZyXEL v yfir a essi b na ur er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og nnur vi eigandi kv i tilskipunar 1999 5 EC Norwegian Erkl rer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999 5 EF Romanian Prin prezenta ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este in conformitate cu cerin ele esen iale si alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999 5 EC National Restrictions This product may be used in all
257. rch 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License
258. rdware Connections and LEDS aaa eec Etat i deck rue aa Ease ene oca idm t map eni cab 169 Z8 NBOHETZBL Acess nnd LOGIN code up Resp mi a IUE acu ad Kabataan SR Eu RAS FR E dan 170 24 3 Mernel rell e H 171 24 4 Resetting the NBG 417N to Its Factory Defaults eessseeeeeeeeeeennennneen nnn nennen 179 24 5 Wireless PROUD AP Troubleshooting 15 ice eiscte teta usotbe va di dued te bv qp eder pep nisan PEN ERec Pep add Ode rob aE 173 NBG 417N User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 25 cae LE ss ec esa icio ee Pn ee ee pe Ne Pye ne ee Oe ee re er ens eee vere ener 175 Appendix A IP Addresses and NU aos se hg eee 179 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions sssseeees 189 Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address eee eerie 201 PT A or c cp LANS T seis 229 APDO E SONCE m C 243 Appendix F Open Software Announcemients unici ecesevecentesusoentsesscenornesncseedcvetnstenevestaes 247 re as G Lega TN TT ro me VE j 281 NBG 417N User s Guide Table of Contents NBG 417N User s Guide PART User s Guide Getting to Know Your NBG 417N 1 1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG 417N The NBG 417N extends the range of your existing wired network without a
259. re the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG 417N s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address Select Clone the computer s MAC address I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Address Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 5 Advanced WAN Screen Use this screen to enable Multicast allow Windows Networking and enable Auto bridge NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN Note The three categories shown in this screen are independent of each other To change your NBG 417N s advanced WAN settings click Network gt WAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 62 Network gt WAN gt Advanced Multicast Setup multicast Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN Allow Trigger Dial Auto bridge Enable Auto bridge mode Apply Reset The following table de
260. re trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP e Go to Network gt Wireless LAN gt General gt WDS and check if the NBG 417N is set to bridge mode Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again Go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General Check your System Operation Mode setting e Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet e Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network If the problem continues contact your ISP I cannot access the Internet anymore I had access to the Internet with the NBG 417N but my Internet connection is not available anymore Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 22 Reboot the NBG 417N If the problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 172 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 5 on page 22 If the NBG 417N is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try m
261. reamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the NBG 417N uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 80 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless
262. reen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG 417N sends to the DHCP clients 108 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server To change your NBG 417N s static DHCP settings click Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced The following screen displays Figure 67 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced Static DHCP Table Fl MAC Address IP Address foo 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 oo 00 00 00 00 00 o oo 0 j o 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 o 0 0 0 T 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 7 00 00 00 00 00 00 foooo 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 o o 0 0 DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP z Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Static DHCP Table This is the index number of the static IP table entry row MAC Address Type the MAC address with colons of a computer on your LAN IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN DNS Server DNS Servers The NBG 417N passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address in the Assigned by DHCP order you specify here to the DHCP clients The NBG 417N only passes this Se
263. resh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs This is the index number of the log entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG 417N s time and date Message This field states the reason for the log NBG 417N User s Guide Tools 21 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG 417N 21 2 What You Can Do e Use the Firmware screen Section 21 3 on page 159 to upload firmware to your NBG 417N e Use the Configuration screen Section 21 4 on page 161 to view information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration e Use the Restart screen Section 21 5 on page 163 to have the NBG 417N reboot 21 3 Firmware Upload Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension e g NBG 417N bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Click Maintenance gt Tools Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG 417N Figure 100 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse
264. ress field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the NBG 417N will disconnect the session immediately 3 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time 4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it 17 3 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the NBG 417N s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the NBG 417N s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 17 3 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The NBG 417N automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling You can change the timeout period in the System screen 17 4 WWW Screen To change your NBG 417N s World Wide Web settings click Management Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen Figure 86 Management Remote MGMT WWW www Server Port 8080 Apply for remote WAN site only Server Access LAN esos iE Secured Client WAN IP Address All C selected po 0 0 Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Table
265. return key on your keyboard e Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen e Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The NBG 417N icon is not an exact representation of your device NBG 417N Computer di NBG 417N User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Server Modem Firewall Telephone Switch C 2 Router NBG 417N User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device e Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There i
266. rk e See System 153 Logs 157 Tools 159 Sys OP Mode 164 and Language 167 for information on configuring your maintenance settings 5 5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG 417N 2 The default IP address of the NBG 417N is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows 4 Type cmd in the dialog box 5 Type ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 201 for information on changing your computer s IP address 6 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser See Chapter 6 on page 55 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP NBG 417N User s Guide Tutorials 6 1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for your NBG 417N as follows e How to Connect to the Internet from an AP e Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG 417N and Wireless Client e Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG 417N e Bandwidth Management for your Network 6 2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point AP and wireless client a notebook B in this
267. rograms which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it
268. rsal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Figure 89 Internet Connection Properties H gt Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using r j amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through shared connection on another computer Show icon in notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 90 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Services Select Ihe services inning on pour rabok that Intemel users can v mimaa 192 168 1 017281 25 A mamas 192 1687 07 Figure 91 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 144 Cancel Note When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in
269. rver information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server Table 44 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG 417N s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read Second DNS Server only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select DNS Relay to have the NBG 417N act as a DNS proxy The NBG 417N s LAN IP address displays in the field to the right read only The NBG 417N tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG 417N itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG 417N the NBG 417N forwards the query to the NBG 417N s system DNS server configured in the WAN gt I nternet Connection screen
270. ryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Win
271. s License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of
272. s on the NBG 417N Wireless Functionality Allows IEEE 802 11b and or IEEE 802 11g wireless clients to connect to the NBG 417N wirelessly Enable wireless security WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Note The NBG 417N may be prone to RF Radio Frequency interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens wireless phones Bluetooth enabled devices and other wireless LANs Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG 417N Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the NBG 417N s configuration and put it back on the NBG 417N later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Firewall You can configure firewall on the NBG 417N for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example Content Filter The NBG 417N blocks or al
273. s Guide Figure 36 Link Status gt Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 A0 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11g gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSI Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength 9999097700 e Link Quality 99099090970 6 If your connection is successful open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured 6 3 Bandwidth Management for your Network This section shows you how to configure the bandwidth management feature on the NBG 417N to limit the bandwidth for specific kinds of outgoing traffic ZyXEL s bandwidth management feature allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application or subnet Use the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen to configure bandwidth management for your network 6 3 1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application For this example your company s customer support department wants to prioritize VoIP e mail and MSN Messenger services In the Priority Queue table VoIP and e mail services are already pre defined However you still need to add MSN Messenger in the list refer to Se
274. s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 21 5 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG 417N without turning the power off Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the NBG 417N reboot This does not affect the NBG 417N s configuration Figure 108 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart NBG 417N User s Guide 163 Sys OP Mode 22 1 Overview The Sys OP Mode System Operation Mode function lets you configure whether your NBG 417N is a router or AP You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device See Section 1 1 on page 21 for more information on which mode to choose 22 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 22 4 on page 165 to select how you connect to the Internet 22 3 What You Need to Know Router A router connects your local network with another network such as the Internet The router has two IP addresses the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address Figure 109 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode LAN u WAN frei tas LAN IP WAN IP NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode AP An AP extends one network
275. s a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet e Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and
276. s in this screen Refer to Table 35 on page 86 for descriptions of other fields in this screen Table 37 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Key Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN NBG 417N User s Guide WAN 8 1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG 417N s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your NBG 417N for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 56 LAN and WAN WAN See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens 8 2 What You Can Do Use the Internet Connection screen Section 8 4 on page 94 to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP DNS and WAN MAC addresses Use the Advanced screen Section 8 5 on page 100 to enable multicasting configure Windows networking and bridge 8 3 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection as well as enable disable some advanced features of your NBG 417N NBG 417N Use
277. s to the NBG 417N Set This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG 417N in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen T 6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow intra BSS networking and set the RTS CTS Threshold 78 Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 47 Network Wireless LAN Advanced Beacon Interval DTIM Period Preamble Type CTS Protection Tx Power Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold Fragment Threshold M Enable Intra 2346 256 2346 2346 256 2346 ioo 20 1024 ms fis 1 40 Long Preamble short Preamble C auto C Always C None 100 96 BSS Traffic Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 LABEL Network Wireless LAN Advanced DESCRIPTION Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear To Send handshake Enter a value between 0 and 2432 NBG 417N User s Guide
278. scribes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network gt WAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Check this to enable multicasting This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN Leaving this blank may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Auto bridge Enable Auto bridge Select this option to have the NBG 417N switch to bridge mode mode automatically when the NBG 417N gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192 168 x y where x and y are from zero to nine no matter what the LAN IP address is Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN NBG 417N User s Guide LAN 9 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings A Local Area Network L
279. se modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Add
280. se this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS on your NBG 417N WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and the WAN MAC address Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION DHCP Server General Use this screen to enable the NBG 417N s DHCP server Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG 417N Advanced Use this screen to change your NBG 417N s port triggering settings DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Content Filter Use this s
281. sired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server If the default is not defined the service request is simply discarded Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded To change your NBG 417N s port forwarding settings click Network gt NAT gt Application The screen appears as shown Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT gt General screen the NBG 417N discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management Refer to Appendix E on page 243 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 71 Network gt NAT gt Application Application Add Application Ru
282. speed in bytes per second on this port Rx B s This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port System Up Time This is the total time the NBG 417N has been on Poll Interval s Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics 3 5 4 Summary WLAN Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink in the Status screen View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG 417N in the Association List Association means that a wireless client for example your network or computer with a wireless network card has connected successfully to the AP or wireless router using the same SSID channel and security settings Figure 8 Summary Wireless Association List Association List EENEEENNNCTT l Association Time 1 00 19 cb 04 80 1e 03 52 42 2000 01 01 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table7 Summary Wireless Association List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG 417N s WLAN network Refresh Click Refresh to reload the list
283. splayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that appl
284. ss to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 118 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example L IA li a T q m D i 192 168 1 33 0 g I EM iB B i Lf 192 168 1 33 hammmmmmm ee Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 119 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example 9mm mum UE ns a LAN WAN a 192 168 1 88 I I i I u L i i i 4 um um um NM UD eee 0 NBG 417N User s Guide 187 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 120 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example eum um um um UM SSS Se 192 168 1 1 WAN m um um um
285. stname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot P address assigned using DHCP NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix C Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 137 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup YaST2 linux h2o0z Address Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices Select Dynamic address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use Network Card Setup General Address onfiguration Name Ethernet I _ No IP Address fo
286. t Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 136 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Mc Devices Network Jools eben ub 3a Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger whois Network device 3i Configure IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 el6c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c sremitied sytes 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0 Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 mm Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE NBG 417N Us
287. t Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings 1 Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 123 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options Ag n General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable in
288. t Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given Mask Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 4 Your IP Address The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG 417N an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP Figure 19 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address STEP 1T TEP2 STEP3 ffi Internet Configuration Get automatically from your ISP Used fixed IP address provided by your ISP Back UU vex et NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is your ISP the default selection If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 4 9 on page 45 Use fixed IP address Select this option if you were given IP address and or DNS server provided by your ISP settings by the ISP The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 5 WAN IP Address Assignment Every computer on the Internet must have a uniq
289. t You Need To Know Content filtering allows you to block certain web features such as cookies and or block access to specific web sites For example you can configure one policy that blocks John Doe s access to arts and entertainment web pages 14 3 1 Content Filtering Profiles A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features Restrict Web Features The NBG 417N can disable web proxies and block web features such as ActiveX controls Java applets and cookies Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG 417N checks the URL s domain name or IP address and file path separately when performing keyword blocking The URL s domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the domain name is www zyxel com tw The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the file path is news pressroom php NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering Since the NBG 417N checks the URL s domain name or IP address and file path separately it will not find items that go across the two For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the NBG 417N would find tw in the domain name www zyxel com tw It would also find news in the file path news pressroom php but it would
290. t assign you a fixed IP address This is the default selection Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Your NBG 417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG 417N WAN IP Address Assign ment Get automatically from ISP Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG 417N s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configu
291. tdg Progs asisten apro Ela spud agat aec s P re pa aant Lot Ri c RS 129 EF ueni CE UU m I T TEE 130 145 Technica FGTEPOTIES ect 131 14 5 1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking enia ci tru tnt an REI RR RR reda hr aka 131 Chapter 15 Stali ROUTE 133 ARE LI IO E 0 ELSE 133 15 2 Wibar PE Dell E eco De vEpA COE A REDVRDR AR VERIS Fd EIN RI P VERUM REA NI PIN RR sas RNR 133 Toa IP SUIS ROUS OEE cuna meer emer eet eee a x OU Ran c o DE Tarte Fu UTE CU utt terre Trt se 134 199 1 Sialic Route SOU SEEEN T 135 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Man Gg GIniG iit sasissessssnetasiaciensassaressasnnsansesdansntaniaaaasasihasnsaaiasndaneidasasansnndansesaasnnsaniandaianiinnnaade 136 LESS II C S UIT RE 136 102 hpc RP REOR EEUU 136 TE What rou Need TO BIOW saguna Dad b danse Rabbi ep a iae caa aab obra NA 137 por ecd RUG OAD E T 137 10S Advanced esie ru eeene ene eet ey teeny Renter e rete rere meer ret 138 18 5 T PUn LS usted pert b cud i a trea req a v EEPOU VER RU EAD d ra NARI 140 16 5 2 User Defined Service Rule Configuration ssesssssssssssseeeeeene nennen 141 16 5 3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services c cccccceeceseececeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeteeneeeseaeeeeeneees 142 10 54 Pee and Pat NOMD S arianen avenues aa iaa patres dua hc Ub b dada fd 142 Chapter 17 Rigpe is W M 143 prEa 11 re 143 Ur Wiha N Can Do MP
292. te down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the NBG 417N to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the NBG 417N You could simply restore your last configuration 1 5 LEDs Figure 2 Front Panel The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The NBG 417N is receiving power and functioning properly cy Off The NBG 417N is not receiving power 22 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG 417N Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION WLAN WPS Green On The NBG 417N is ready but is not sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Blinking The NBG 417N is sending receiving data through the T wireless LAN The NBG 417N is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed WAN Green On The NBG 417N has a successful 10 100MB WAN connection Blinking The NBG 417N is sending receiving data through the WAN off The WAN connection is not ready or has fail
293. ter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 3 1 3 User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user e In the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database e In a RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a
294. that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal enc
295. that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the NBG 417N User s Guide
296. the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public Lic
297. the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work NBG 417N User s Guide 257 Appendix F Open Software Announcements in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of th
298. the PBC Push Button Configuration method to configure wireless stations s wireless settings See Section 6 2 1 1 on page 56 Click this to start WPS aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization Or input station s Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure PIN number wireless station s wireless settings See Section 6 2 1 2 on page 57 Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station s utility Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 10 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling tab Figure 52 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling Scheduling Wireless LAN Scheduling Setup Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling action Day Except for the following times Con off L everyday oo hour oo min o0 x hour oo min C on otf I Mon foo hour oo x min oo x hour o0 v min Con off Tue Joo hour oo x min oo hour o0 v min Con og C wed Joo hour oo x min
299. the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration The NBG 417N offers three Internet connection types They are Ethernet PPP over Ethernet or PPTP The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard does not detect a connection type you must select one from the drop down list box Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select Figure 15 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP3 fa Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet PPTP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet PPPoE Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection If your ISP gave you an IP address and or subnet mask then select PPTP PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial up connection NBG 417N User s Guide Ea Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 4 1 Ethernet Connection Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Continue to Section 4 4 4 on page 42 Figure 16
300. they connect and set up a secure network by themselves See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6 2 1 on page 55 7 4 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the NBG 417N from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG 417N s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG 417N s new settings NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 42 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup Name SSID I Hide SSID Channel Width Security Security Mode IV Enable Wireless LAN Channel Selection Operating Channel qQ Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz z Auto Channel Selection Channel 6 Auto 20 40 MHz z No Security Apply Reset The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Click the check box to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Name SSID Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated Wir
301. tion Idle Timeout p in minutes DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP WAN MAC Address ia Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C set WAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial up Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Retype to Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly Confirm Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Connection Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server DNS Servers NBG 417N User s Guide 97 Chapter 8 WAN Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG 417N s WAN IP address T
302. tion for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on that network or else the computer must be manually configured NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Click the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the NBG 417N s DHCP server Figure 6 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Table SL RN YT 192 168 1 33 TWPC12731 00 19 cb 04 80 1e 192 168 1 35 twpcl2116 00 02 e3 56 16 9d Retresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table5 Summary DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Host Name This field displays the computer host name MAC Address _ This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address which uniquely identifies a device The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Refresh Click Refresh to renew the screen 3 5 3 Summary Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics Details hyperlin
303. to port unauthorized request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG 417N services unseen By default this option is not selected and the NBG 417N will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG 417N s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the NBG 417N reacts based on the firewall policy which by default is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet You can use the command sys firewall tcprst rst on off to change this policy When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet it drops the packet without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again NBG 417N User s Guide Content Filtering 14 1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords 14 2 What You Can Do Use the Filter Section 14 4 on page 130 screen to restrict web features add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer 14 3 Wha
304. to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely becau
305. to the location of the binary bin upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary bin file In some cases you may need to reconfigure File Path l Browse Upload NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Note Do not turn off the NBG 417N while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the NBG 417N again Figure 101 Upload Warning Firmware Upload In Process y p CE Please Wait EVI Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes To access the device after a successful firmware upload you need to log in again Check your new firmware version in the system status menu The NBG 417N automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary n
306. ts security settings j Aa o e Intemet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet Eo This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional F Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 126 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting B Active scripting Oep 8 Allow paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt 8 Scripting of Java applets Q Disable Prompt bd Ilene im AM Fs Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset cm i Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 UnderJava permissions make sure that
307. tton Log into NBG 417N s Web Configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network gt Wireless Client WPS Station screen Note Your NBG 417N has a WPS button located on its panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility Both buttons have exactly the same function you can use one or the other Note It doesn t matter which button is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one The NBG 417N sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG 417N securely NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG 417N and wireless client the NWD210N in this example Figure 29 Example WPS Process PBC Method Wireless Client NBG 417N WITHIN 2 MINUTES D SECURITY INFO L ummmmmmmmmmmmmmm Sy COMMUNICATION 6 2 1 2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both NBG 417N s configuration interface and the client s utilities 1 Launch your wireless client s configuration utility Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station screen on the NBG 417N 3 Click the St
308. ue IP address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for instance only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks Table 15 Private IP Address Ranges 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 4 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of r
309. uide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 5 Connection Wizard Complete Click Finish to complete the wizard setup Figure 22 Connection Wizard Complete Congratulation The Connection Wizard configuration is complete Please p Finish button to complete Connection Wizard L products at www zyxel com ard rrect but still ot Int then check that your i z Well done You have successfully set up your NBG 417N to operate on your network and access the Internet NBG 417N User s Guide 47 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard NBG 417N User s Guide AP Mode 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG 417N is set to AP Mode Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode Note See Chapter 6 on page 55 for an example of setting up a wireless network in AP mode Use your NBG 417N as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network In this mode your device bridges a wired network LAN and wireless LAN WLAN in the same subnet See the figure below for an example Figure 23 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode a 5 2 Setting your NBG 417N to AP Mode LAN 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode 2 To set your NBG 417N to AP Mode go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select Access Point
310. uld select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG 417N Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG 417N User s Guide Logs 20 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG 417N s logs The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG 417N s logs in one location 20 2 What You Can Do Use the View Log screen Section 20 4 on page 157 to see the logs for the categories such as system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites blocked web features and so on 20 3 What You Need to Know An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies active X and so on Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as soon as the log is full see Log Schedule Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access
311. upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php NBG 417N User s Guide 275 Appendix G Legal Information Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com Regulatory Informati
312. uter from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG 417N 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG 417N 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the NBG 417N 5 Check that both the NBG 417N and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG 417N 7 Make sure you allow the NBG 417N to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface Check your remote management settings e See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information NBG 417N User s Guide 173 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting to select Router Mode I set up URL keyword blocking but I can still access a website that should be blocked Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL customize the keyword blocking using commands See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter I can access the I
313. vered to systems A and D IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data The NBG 417N supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the NBG 417N queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the NBG 417N periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the NBG 417N LAN and or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 8 3 3 NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 3 4 Auto Bridge In the rear panel of your NBG 417N you can see four LAN ports 1 to 4 and one WAN port The WAN port is for your Internet access connection and the LAN ports are for your network devices The WAN port has a different IP address from the LAN ports When you enable auto bridging in your NBG 417N all five ports 4 LAN ports and the WAN port share the same IP address as shown in the figure below Figure 58
314. width to specific protocols on an IP or IP range Refer to Section 16 5 on page 138 Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature Total Bandwidth Setting The fields below appear when you enable Bandwidth Management Uplink Type or select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kbps to 30 Mbps that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps This is traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN Downlink Type or select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kbps to 30 Mbps that you want to dedicate to downlink traffic If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps This is traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 5 Advanced Configuration Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre defined services or applications Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range Note This screen contains the Priority Queue and Bandwidth Allocation tables Though both tables are described in this section you can only apply the rules in one tabl
315. wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode The NBG 417N can establish up to five wireless links with other APs Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature Local MAC This is the MAC address of your NBG 417N Address Remote MAC This is the MAC address of the peer device that your NBG 417N wants to make a Address bridge connection with You can connect to up to 4 peer devices Security BEPUITENUMOdS Note WDS security is independent of the security settings between the NBG 417N and any wireless clients The WDS is set to No Security by default e Refer to Section 7 11 1 on page 87 to view the screen for Static WEP security e Refer to Section 7 11 2 on page 88 to view the screen for WPA2 PSK security NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to NBG 417N Refresh Click Refresh to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 11 1 Security Mode Static WEP Use this screen to configure the Static WEP security for your NBG 417N when it is in AP Bridge or Bridge Only mode Figure 54 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS Static WEP WDS Setup Basic Setting Disable Local MAC Address 00 BB 97 53 03 40 Remote MAC Address o0 00 00 00 00 00 Security Security Mode Static W
316. x and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords 130 NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering Table 52 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG 417N features described in this chapter 14 5 1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a website s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default the NBG 417N checks the URL s domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking This means that the NBG 417N checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php content filtering only searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG 417N check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php full path URL checking searches for keywords within www zyxel
317. y s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License
318. y to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation 268 NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who
319. you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed NBG 417N User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary t
320. you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program pr
321. you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Type a new password and retype it to confirm and click Apply or click Ignore Figure 3 Change Password Screen Please enter a new password Note The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator I nactivity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the NBG 417N if this happens Select the setup mode you want to use e Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and Wireless setup Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG 417N s settings e Select a language to go to the basic Web Configurator in that language To change to the advanced configurator see Chapter 23 on page 167 Figure4 Selecting the setup mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode Francais ELI NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 3 3 Resetting the NBG 417N If you forget your password or IP address or you cannot access the Web Configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG 417N to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192 168 1 1 3 3 1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for l
322. your changes back to the NBG 417N Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen NBG 417N User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 8 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable disable WPS view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS tab Figure 50 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS WPS Setup Enable wes PIN Number 54403208 Generate WPS Status Status Configured Release configuration 802 11 Mode 802 11 b g n SSID ZyXEL NBG 417N Security No Security Q note If you enable WPS the UPnP service will be turned on automatically Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select this to enable the WPS feature PIN Number This displays a PIN number last time system generated Click Generate to generate a new PIN number WPS Status Status This displays Configured when the NBG 417N has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG 417N or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless an

ZyXEL NBG-417N User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents